Panasonic KX-TEM824 Features Manual
advertisement
Assistant Bot
Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
271
Advanced Hybrid System Feature Guide Model KX-TES824 KX-TEM824 Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. Introduction About this Feature Guide The Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. It explains what the Advanced Hybrid System can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities. The Feature Guide is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Call Handling Features Describes the features of the Advanced Hybrid System related to making and receiving calls, and operating telephones. Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features Describes the features that allow the Advanced Hybrid System to be configured and administered to suit the needs of its users. Section 3, Programming Instructions Serves as an overall system programming reference for the Advanced Hybrid System. Section 4, Appendix Provides tables that describe the resource capacity of the Advanced Hybrid System, as well as its different tones and ring tones. Index References Found in the Feature Guide Installation Manual References The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference. Feature Guide References Related sections of the Feature Guide are listed for your reference. User Manual References The User Manual describes how users can access commonly used PBX features and functions with their proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles. Sections from the User Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference. PT Programming References Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). These PT programming items are noted throughout the Feature Guide for your reference by title and programme number. The following is an example of a PT Programming reference: "Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101])." 2 Feature Guide Links to Other Pages and Manuals If you are viewing this Feature Guide with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature Guide and other Advanced Hybrid System manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section. Linked items include: • Installation Manual References • Feature Guide References • User Manual References • PT Programming References Notes • • Certain PTs, features, and optional service cards are not available in some areas. Consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Every system programming setting can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.1 PC Programming). For programming details, refer to the online help that is installed along with KX-TE Maintenance Console ( 3.2.1 Installing and Starting KXTE Maintenance Console). The KX-TES824E, the KX-TES824NE, the KX-TES824GR/KX-TEM824GR, the KX-TES824CE/KX-TEM824CE, and the KX-TES824PD/KX-TEM824PD are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting: http://doc.panasonic.de Contact: Panasonic Services Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, F.R. Germany Trademarks • • • Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners. Feature Guide 3 List of Abbreviations A AA Automated Attendant APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone ARS Automatic Route Selection BGM Background Music BSS Busy Station Signalling BV Built-in Voice Message COS Class of Service CPC Calling Party Control DIL Direct In Line DISA Direct Inward System Access DND Do Not Disturb DRD Distinctive Ring Detection DSS Direct Station Selection DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency E EFA External Feature Access F FWD Call Forwarding G G-CO Group-CO I IRNA Intercept Routing—No Answer L LCS Live Call Screening LED Light Emitting Diode O-CO Other-CO OGM Outgoing Message PF Programmable Feature PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PT Proprietary Telephone S-CO Single-CO SLT Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMS Short Message Service TRS Toll Restriction TAM Telephone Answering Machine U UCD Uniform Call Distribution V VM Voice Mail VPS Voice Processing System B C D O P S T 4 Feature Guide Feature Highlights Built-in Voice Message (BV) (Optional voice message card required) Built-in Voice Message (BV) allows a caller to leave a voice message in a user's personal message area or the PBX's common message area ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)). Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS (Optional Caller ID card required) The PBX can relay incoming calls from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS. Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access ( 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS). Caller ID Display on SLT (Optional Caller ID card required) The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of some SLTs as well as proprietary telephones (PTs) when receiving calls ( 1.16.1 Caller ID). 3-level Automated Attendant (AA) 3-level Automated Attendant (AA) service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (Direct Inward System Access [DISA] AA number) following the guidance of 3-level DISA outgoing messages (OGMs), and be connected to the desired party automatically ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)). PC Programming System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance Console software as well as by using a PT ( 2.3.1 PC Programming). The PBX software can be upgraded via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) or USB port, using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade). Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically configured the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software, or after the PBX data has been cleared ( 2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type). Advanced Hybrid System This PBX supports the connection of PTs*1, Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and single line devices such as SLTs, fax machines, wireless telephones, and data terminals. *1 In this manual, "proprietary telephone" ("PT") means an analogue proprietary telephone (APT). Feature Guide 5 Table of Contents 1 6 Call Handling Features......................................................................... 13 1.1 1.1.1 Incoming Call Features..................................................................................................14 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................14 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) .......................................................................................................................................... 14 Intercept Routing ............................................................................................................................................. 15 1.1.2 1.1.3 Internal Call Features.......................................................................................................16 Incoming Call Indication Features .................................................................................... 17 1.1.3.1 1.1.3.2 1.1.3.3 1.1.3.4 1.1.3.5 Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW............................................................................................. 17 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection............................................................................................................... 18 Ring Tone Pattern Selection ............................................................................................................................ 19 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand ......................................................................................... 20 Call Waiting ..................................................................................................................................................... 22 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3 1.3.1 Receiving Group Features ............................................................................................ 23 Idle Extension Hunting .....................................................................................................23 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) .......................................................................................25 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring ......................................................................28 Log-in/Log-out ..................................................................................................................29 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features .............................................30 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND).................................................................30 1.3.1.1 1.3.1.2 1.3.1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW.......................................................................... 30 Call Forwarding (FWD) .................................................................................................................................... 31 Do Not Disturb (DND)...................................................................................................................................... 34 1.4 1.4.1 Answering Features.......................................................................................................35 Answering Features .........................................................................................................35 1.4.1.1 1.4.1.2 1.4.1.3 1.4.1.4 Answering Features—OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 35 Line Preference—Incoming ............................................................................................................................. 36 Call Pickup....................................................................................................................................................... 37 Hands-free Answerback .................................................................................................................................. 38 1.5 1.5.1 Making Call Features .....................................................................................................39 Intercom Call Features .....................................................................................................39 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call ................................................................................................................................................... 39 1.5.2 Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................................41 1.5.2.1 1.5.2.2 1.5.2.3 1.5.2.4 1.5.2.5 1.5.2.6 1.5.2.7 Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW............................................................................................... 41 Emergency Call ............................................................................................................................................... 42 Account Code Entry ........................................................................................................................................ 43 Dial Type Selection .......................................................................................................................................... 44 Reverse Circuit ................................................................................................................................................ 45 Pause Insertion................................................................................................................................................ 46 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) .................................. 47 1.5.3 Seizing a Line Features ...................................................................................................49 1.5.3.1 1.5.3.2 1.5.3.3 Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................ 49 Line Preference—Outgoing ............................................................................................................................. 50 Outside (CO) Line Access ............................................................................................................................... 51 1.6 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features ............................................................................................. 53 Memory Dialling Features ................................................................................................53 1.6.1.1 1.6.1.2 1.6.1.3 1.6.1.4 1.6.1.5 1.6.1.6 1.6.1.7 Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 53 One-touch Dialling ........................................................................................................................................... 55 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling.......................................................................................................................... 56 Redial ............................................................................................................................................................. 57 Speed Dialling—Personal/System................................................................................................................... 58 Quick Dialling................................................................................................................................................... 59 Hot Line ........................................................................................................................................................... 60 Feature Guide 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.9 1.9.1 1.10 1.10.1 1.10.2 1.10.3 1.10.4 1.10.5 1.10.6 1.10.7 1.10.8 1.10.9 1.10.10 1.11 1.11.1 1.12 1.12.1 1.12.2 1.12.3 1.12.4 1.12.5 1.13 1.13.1 Busy Line/Busy Party Features.................................................................................... 61 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)............................................................................... 61 Executive Busy Override ................................................................................................. 62 Call Waiting Tone............................................................................................................. 63 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features .................................................................................... 64 Toll Restriction (TRS)....................................................................................................... 64 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code ........................................................... 68 Extension Lock ................................................................................................................ 70 Walking COS ................................................................................................................... 71 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features ................................................................ 72 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ................................................................................... 72 Conversation Features.................................................................................................. 78 Hands-free Operation ...................................................................................................... 78 Room Monitor .................................................................................................................. 79 Microphone Mute............................................................................................................. 80 Headset Operation .......................................................................................................... 81 Data Line Security ........................................................................................................... 82 Flash/Recall..................................................................................................................... 83 External Feature Access (EFA) ....................................................................................... 84 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation .................................................................................... 85 Parallelled Telephone ...................................................................................................... 86 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ................................................................. 87 Transferring Features.................................................................................................... 88 Call Transfer..................................................................................................................... 88 Holding Features ........................................................................................................... 90 Call Hold .......................................................................................................................... 90 Call Park .......................................................................................................................... 92 Call Splitting..................................................................................................................... 93 Music on Hold.................................................................................................................. 94 Consultation Hold ............................................................................................................ 95 Conference Features..................................................................................................... 96 Conference Features ....................................................................................................... 96 1.13.1.1 1.13.1.2 Conference Features—OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................96 Conference ......................................................................................................................................................97 1.14 1.14.1 1.15 1.15.1 1.15.2 1.15.3 1.15.4 1.15.5 1.15.6 1.15.7 1.16 1.16.1 1.16.2 1.17 1.17.1 1.17.2 1.17.3 Paging Features............................................................................................................. 99 Paging ............................................................................................................................. 99 Optional Device Features ........................................................................................... 100 Doorphone Call ............................................................................................................. 100 Door Open ..................................................................................................................... 101 Doorbell/Door Chime ..................................................................................................... 102 Background Music (BGM) ............................................................................................. 104 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD ..................................................................... 105 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................................................ 106 Built-in Voice Message (BV) .......................................................................................... 114 Caller ID Features ........................................................................................................ 119 Caller ID......................................................................................................................... 119 Incoming Call Log.......................................................................................................... 123 Message Features ....................................................................................................... 126 Message Waiting ........................................................................................................... 126 Absent Message............................................................................................................ 128 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS.................................................................................... 129 Feature Guide 7 1.18 1.18.1 1.18.2 1.18.3 1.18.4 1.19 1.19.1 1.19.2 1.20 1.20.1 1.20.2 1.21 1.21.1 1.21.2 1.22 1.22.1 1.22.2 2 System Configuration and Administration Features ...................... 159 2.1 2.1.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 3 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features ......................................................................... 133 Fixed Buttons ................................................................................................................. 133 Flexible Buttons..............................................................................................................135 LED Indication................................................................................................................137 Display Information.........................................................................................................139 Voice Mail Features ...................................................................................................... 140 Voice Mail APT Integration ............................................................................................. 140 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration............................................................................146 Administrative Information Output Features.............................................................149 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)...................................................................149 Call Log Printout for Each Extension .............................................................................154 Extension Controlling Features .................................................................................. 155 Extension Feature Clear ................................................................................................155 Timed Reminder.............................................................................................................156 Audible Tone Features................................................................................................. 157 Dial Tone ........................................................................................................................157 Confirmation Tone ..........................................................................................................158 System Configuration—Hardware ..............................................................................160 Extension Jack Configuration......................................................................................... 160 System Configuration—Software ...............................................................................161 Class of Service (COS) .................................................................................................. 161 Group .............................................................................................................................162 Time Service ..................................................................................................................164 Operator/Manager Features........................................................................................... 167 System Data Control....................................................................................................169 PC Programming............................................................................................................169 PT Programming ............................................................................................................172 Automatic Time Adjustment ........................................................................................... 174 Feature Numbering ........................................................................................................ 175 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type .....................................................180 Country Setting ..............................................................................................................181 Firmware Upgrade .........................................................................................................182 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics ........................................................................................183 Power Failure Transfer....................................................................................................183 Power Failure Restart.....................................................................................................184 Programming Instructions................................................................. 185 3.1 3.1.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 Introduction ..................................................................................................................186 Introduction ....................................................................................................................186 PC Programming .......................................................................................................... 187 Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console .....................................................187 PT Programming .......................................................................................................... 188 Programming Instructions ..............................................................................................188 Programming Procedures ..............................................................................................193 Date & Time [000].......................................................................................................................................... 193 System Speed Dialling Number [001]............................................................................................................ 193 System Password [002] ................................................................................................................................. 194 DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] ............................................................................................................ 195 Console Paired Telephone [004].................................................................................................................... 195 One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] .............................................................................................. 195 8 Feature Guide Time Service Switching Mode [006] ..............................................................................................................196 Time Service Start Time [007] .......................................................................................................................196 Operator Assignment [008] ............................................................................................................................196 Extension Number [009] ................................................................................................................................197 LCD Time Display [010] .................................................................................................................................197 System Speed Dialling Name [011] ...............................................................................................................198 Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]..........................................................................................................198 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] ...............................................................................................................199 Hunting Group Set [100] ................................................................................................................................199 Hunting Type [101] .........................................................................................................................................199 DTMF Integration Port [102] ..........................................................................................................................200 DTMF Integration [103] ..................................................................................................................................200 SLT Hold Mode [104] .....................................................................................................................................200 Conference Tone [105]...................................................................................................................................200 External Pager Access Tone [106].................................................................................................................201 DTMF Receiver Check [107]..........................................................................................................................201 Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]...........................................................................................201 CO Indicator [109]..........................................................................................................................................201 Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] .........................................................................................................................202 Music on Hold [111] .......................................................................................................................................202 DSS Lamp Mode [112] ..................................................................................................................................202 Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]............................................................................................................202 Automatic Redial Interval [114] ......................................................................................................................203 Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] ................................................................................................................203 Conference Pattern [116]...............................................................................................................................203 Call Pickup Tone [117] ...................................................................................................................................203 Pulse Restriction [118]...................................................................................................................................204 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] ............................................................................................204 Bell Frequency [120] ......................................................................................................................................204 Automatic Line Access [121]..........................................................................................................................204 Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]................................................................................................204 Break Ratio [123] ...........................................................................................................................................205 TRS Check for * and # [125] ..........................................................................................................................205 DSS Off-hook Mode [126]..............................................................................................................................205 Pickup Group [127] ........................................................................................................................................205 Ringback Tone Pattern [128]..........................................................................................................................205 VM 1 APT Port [130] ......................................................................................................................................206 VM 2 APT Port [131] ......................................................................................................................................206 SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] .........................................................................................................................206 SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] ..........................................................................................................................207 SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145].......................................................................................................207 SMS Routing Table—CO [146] ......................................................................................................................207 SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]............................................................................................................208 SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]................................................................................................................208 SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] ......................................................................................................208 Automatic Time Adjustment [152] ..................................................................................................................208 Incoming Reverse [153] .................................................................................................................................208 Hold Recall Time [200] ..................................................................................................................................209 Transfer Recall Time [201] .............................................................................................................................209 Call Forwarding Start Time [202] ...................................................................................................................209 Hot Line Waiting Time [203]...........................................................................................................................209 Call Duration Counter Start [204]...................................................................................................................209 CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205] ................................................................................................................210 Dialling Start Time [206] ................................................................................................................................210 Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] ..........................................................................................................210 Inter-digit Time [208]......................................................................................................................................210 DTMF Time [210]...........................................................................................................................................211 No Dial Disconnection [211] ..........................................................................................................................211 Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]......................................................................................................211 Bell-off Detection [213] ..................................................................................................................................211 Feature Guide 9 BV Recording Time [214] .............................................................................................................................. 211 Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215] ...................................................................................... 212 Carrier Exception Code [300] ........................................................................................................................ 212 TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]..................................................................................................... 212 TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]........................................................................................................ 212 TRS—Exception Code [306] ......................................................................................................................... 213 Emergency Number [309].............................................................................................................................. 213 Account Code [310] ....................................................................................................................................... 213 Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] .......................................................................................................... 214 TRS—Extension Lock Class [312] ................................................................................................................ 214 ARS Selection [350] ...................................................................................................................................... 214 Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] ............................................................................................................. 214 Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] ............................................................................................................ 215 1st Carrier Selection Code [359] ................................................................................................................... 215 ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360] ..................................................................................................... 215 ARS Modification—Added Number [361] ...................................................................................................... 216 ARS Dial Tone [362] ...................................................................................................................................... 216 ARS Inter-digit Time [363] ............................................................................................................................. 216 ARS CO Line Group [364] ............................................................................................................................. 216 Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] ....................................................................................................... 217 Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] ............................................................................................................. 217 Itemised Billing Code [389]............................................................................................................................ 217 Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]..................................................................................... 218 CO Line Connection [400] ............................................................................................................................. 218 Dial Mode [401] ............................................................................................................................................. 218 Pulse Speed [402] ......................................................................................................................................... 219 Host PBX Access Code [403]........................................................................................................................ 219 CO Line Group Number [404]........................................................................................................................ 219 Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]................................................................................. 220 Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]............................................................................................... 220 Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413] .............................................................................................. 221 CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] ................................................................................................. 221 Pause Time [417] .......................................................................................................................................... 223 Flash/Recall Time [418]................................................................................................................................. 223 Automatic Designated Line Access [419] ...................................................................................................... 223 CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]......................................................................................................... 224 CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]......................................................................................................... 224 Disconnect Time [422]................................................................................................................................... 224 CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]................................................................................................................... 225 Polarity Reverse Detection [424] ................................................................................................................... 225 Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only).............................................................................................................. 226 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) ........................................................................ 226 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only).................... 227 DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only).................... 227 DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only).................................................................... 228 DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] ............................................................................................ 228 DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] ............................................................................................................. 228 DISA Built-in AA [501] ................................................................................................................................... 229 FAX Connection [503].................................................................................................................................... 229 DISA Delayed Answer Time [504] ................................................................................................................. 229 DISA Wait Time after OGM [505] .................................................................................................................. 229 DISA Busy Mode [506] .................................................................................................................................. 230 DISA Intercept Mode [507] ............................................................................................................................ 230 DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508].......................................................................................................... 230 DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]............................................................................................................. 230 DISA No Dial Mode [510] .............................................................................................................................. 231 DISA Security Mode [511] ............................................................................................................................. 231 DISA Security Code [512] ............................................................................................................................. 231 Cyclic Tone Detection [513] ........................................................................................................................... 232 FAX Tone Detection [514].............................................................................................................................. 232 10 Feature Guide Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] ...........................................................................................................232 DISA Incoming Assignment [516] ..................................................................................................................232 DISA AA Wait Time [517]...............................................................................................................................233 DISA Tone after Security Code [518].............................................................................................................233 OGM Mute Time [519] ...................................................................................................................................233 UCD Group [520] ...........................................................................................................................................233 UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] .......................................................................................................................233 UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] .......................................................................................................234 UCD Busy Mode [523] ...................................................................................................................................234 UCD Intercept Mode [524] .............................................................................................................................234 UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]...........................................................................................................234 UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] .............................................................................................................234 UCD Waiting Message [527]..........................................................................................................................235 DISA Security Code Digits [530]....................................................................................................................235 DISA Ringback Tone [531].............................................................................................................................235 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]...................................................................................................................235 Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]...............................................................................................................236 Extension Group [600] ...................................................................................................................................236 TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603] ........................................................................................................236 Extension Name [604] ...................................................................................................................................237 Account Code Mode [605] .............................................................................................................................237 Call Transfer to CO Line [606]........................................................................................................................237 Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]...................................................................................................................238 Executive Busy Override [608].......................................................................................................................238 DND Override [609] .......................................................................................................................................238 Parallelled Telephone [610]............................................................................................................................239 TAM Extension [611] ......................................................................................................................................239 Room Monitor [612] .......................................................................................................................................239 CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]...........................................................................................................240 Internal Pulse Detection [614]........................................................................................................................240 LCD Language [615]......................................................................................................................................240 Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] ....................................................................................................................241 Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] ...............................................................................................241 SLT Message Waiting [619] ...........................................................................................................................242 LCS Recording Mode Set [620] .....................................................................................................................242 BV Resource [621].........................................................................................................................................242 BV for Extension [622] ...................................................................................................................................243 BV Access Code through CO Line [625] .......................................................................................................243 BGM Control for APT [626] ............................................................................................................................243 SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]..........................................................................................................244 SLT Caller ID [628].........................................................................................................................................244 SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] ..........................................................................................................................244 Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] .........................................................................................245 Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]....................................................................................................245 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] ..............................................................................................................246 Doorphone Access Tone [707].......................................................................................................................246 Doorphone Ring Time [708]...........................................................................................................................246 Door Open Duration [709]..............................................................................................................................247 Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] ........................................................................................................................247 Doorphone Chime Assignment [711].............................................................................................................247 Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] ....................................................................................................................248 SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800] ..................................................................................................................248 SMDR Parameter [801]..................................................................................................................................249 Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] ......................................................................................249 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803].............................................................................................249 System Data Dump [804]...............................................................................................................................249 SMDR Account Code [805]............................................................................................................................250 SMDR Language [806] ..................................................................................................................................250 BV Total Recording Time [807] ......................................................................................................................250 BV Card Initialisation [808] ............................................................................................................................251 Feature Guide 11 Caller ID [900]................................................................................................................................................ 251 Caller ID Area Code [901] ............................................................................................................................. 251 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902].................................................................................................... 252 Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]...................................................................................... 252 Caller ID Log Priority [904] ............................................................................................................................ 252 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905].............................................................................................................. 253 Caller ID SMDR Format [906]........................................................................................................................ 253 Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] ...................................................................................................................... 253 Common Area Call Log Check [909] ............................................................................................................. 253 Caller ID Type [910] ....................................................................................................................................... 254 Call Log Next Page [927] .............................................................................................................................. 254 SMDR Mode for Printing [929] ...................................................................................................................... 254 Call Forwarding Selection [963]..................................................................................................................... 254 TRS Check after Answering [966] ................................................................................................................. 255 TRS Check Time after Answering [967] ........................................................................................................ 255 KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] ............................................................................................ 255 Country [995]................................................................................................................................................. 255 Firmware Version [998].................................................................................................................................. 256 System Data Clear [999] ............................................................................................................................... 256 4 Appendix ............................................................................................. 257 4.1 4.1.1 4.2 4.2.1 Capacity of System Resources...................................................................................258 Capacity of System Resources ......................................................................................258 Tones/Ring Tones.........................................................................................................260 Tones/Ring Tones...........................................................................................................260 Index .......................................................................................................... 265 12 Feature Guide Section 1 Call Handling Features Feature Guide 13 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.1 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL) Description Directs incoming outside (CO) line calls to a preprogrammed destination based on the outside (CO) line carrying the call. Each outside (CO) line can have a different destination for each time service mode. [Programming Example] The table can be programmed for each outside (CO) line. Distribution method and destination* Outside (CO) Line No. Day * Lunch Night 1 DIL 101 DIL 102 DIL 102 2 DIL 103 DIL 103 DIL 103 (Cont.) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 8 Normal – Normal – Normal – CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] In this example: If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1: a) In day mode: Direct In Line (DIL) distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination, extension 101. b) In lunch/night mode: DIL distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination, extension 102. Conditions • • • To use this feature, "DIL" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port. When "Normal" is selected, an incoming outside (CO) line call is received at the extensions assigned in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]. This outside (CO) line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls, but can only be used by a single extension to receive calls. If a DIL destination is an extension within an extension group that has enabled the Idle Extension Hunting feature and it is busy, the Idle Extension Hunting feature becomes active ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Time Service 14 Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing Description Redirects incoming outside (CO) line calls via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) feature to a preprogrammed destination when the original destination does not, or cannot, answer the call. There are 2 types of Intercept Routing, described below. Type Description No Dial After hearing a dial tone (short beep) or a DISA outgoing message (OGM), if the caller does not dial anything or enters an unrecognised input, the call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority: DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508], UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority: DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] Feature Guide References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) Feature Guide 15 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.2 Internal Call Features Description There are 2 types of internal calls, described below. Feature 16 Description Details in Intercom Call A call from one extension to another. Doorphone Call A call made from a doorphone to its preprogrammed destination • 1.15.1 for the current time service mode, assigned to the doorphone's Doorphone Call port ( 2.2.3 Time Service). Feature Guide • 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features 1.1.3.1 Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW Description Extension telephones can indicate an incoming call in various ways, described below. Indication Type Feature Description Details in Ring/No Ring Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection Each extension can be programmed to • 1.1.3.2 Outside ring or not ring when receiving an outside (CO) Line Ringing (CO) line call. Selection Ring Tone Ring Tone Pattern Selection A telephone rings when receiving a call. • 1.1.3.3 Ring A different ring tone pattern can be Tone Pattern assigned to each incoming call type. Selection Voice-calling Alternate Receiving—Ring/ Voice Proprietary telephone (PT) users can choose how their telephones receive intercom calls, by selecting to hear ring tones or the caller's voice. LED (Light Emitting LED Indication Diode) • 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call The LED indicators on a PT can indicate • 1.18.3 LED Indication the status of different lines using light patterns and colours. Display (Caller Information) • 1.18.4 Display Display Information A user's PT can show a variety of Information information on the display, such as the outside (CO) line number, the caller's name and number, the extension number and name of the calling extension after the call is forwarded, etc. Tone During a Conversation Call Waiting When an extension user is in the middle • 1.1.3.5 Call of a call, the user can be alerted to a new Waiting call by a call waiting tone. Feature Guide 17 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection Description An extension user can select whether the telephone will ring or not when receiving call(s) from assigned or all outside (CO) lines through personal programming. Conditions • • System programming determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]). If an outside (CO) line call reaches a user's extension, but the extension is set to not ring, the CO button will flash. The outside (CO) line call can be answered by pressing the flashing CO button. User Manual References 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 18 Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Description A different ring tone pattern can be assigned to each incoming call type, such as intercom calls ( Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]), calls from each doorphone ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]), and calls from each outside (CO) line ( CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]). Available ring tone patterns are as follows: [Ring Tone Patterns] 1s Single Double Triple S-Double (Doorphone only) Conditions • The ring tone pattern for incoming calls (intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls) to a single line telephone (SLT) can be fixed to "Single" or "Double" for each extension through system programming ( SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]). The length of the ring tone pattern depends on the preprogrammed length of the bell-on signal ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), combined with the ratio between the bell signals of the SLT ( SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]). Depending on the type of SLT being used, the SLT may not ring properly, if the ring tone pattern of the SLT is set differently from that used by the telephone company. Feature Guide References 1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones Feature Guide 19 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand Description Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) is only available in New Zealand. The PBX can detect the following 4 ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company for each outside (CO) line. When the PBX detects one of the ring tone patterns, the call will be transferred to the preprogrammed destination(s) automatically according to system programming. In addition, the extension ring tone pattern for the detected call can be assigned through system programming as shown below. [Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company] 1s Pattern 1 (Normal) Pattern 2 (Voice) Pattern 3 (Modem/Voice) Pattern 4 (Fax) Pattern Destination assigned in Ring Tone Pattern assigned in CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] 1 Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408410], or sent to the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) line or Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group 2 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment— DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand (New Zealand only) only) 3 DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment— DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand (New Zealand only) only) 4 FAX Connection [503] CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] Conditions • To use this feature, "UCD", "DISA", or "Normal" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and DRD must be enabled ( Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)). Feature Guide References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 20 Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones Feature Guide 21 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.3.5 Call Waiting Description A busy extension user can be alerted to a new call by Call Waiting. The busy extension user can then answer the second call either by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. If Call Waiting is enabled, a call waiting tone will be sent to the user under the following conditions: a) When an outside (CO) line call or a doorphone call is received, or b) When another extension executes the Busy Station Signalling (BSS) feature. If disabled, a reorder tone will be sent to the extension that executed the BSS feature. Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting feature provided by the PBX, you can also subscribe to your telephone company's Call Waiting service and receive call waiting tones through the telephone company's lines. This feature is available when an extension is in a conversation with an outside party, and a call is received from another outside party on the same outside (CO) line. The external call waiting tone will alert an extension user of the incoming outside (CO) line call that is waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. If a call waiting tone is heard but the corresponding CO button does not flash, this tone is an external call waiting tone from the telephone company. For details, consult your telephone company. Conditions • • • Data Line Security When an extension user activates Data Line Security, Call Waiting is turned off ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security). Call Waiting Tone A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred call waiting tone through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). Caller ID Information When an extension receives a call waiting tone, the caller's information will flash on the display for 5 seconds at 15-second intervals. Feature Guide References 1.7.3 Call Waiting Tone 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones User Manual References 1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting 1.7.3 Receiving Call Waiting 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 22 Feature Guide 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting Description If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the call to an idle member of the same extension group, if that group has been assigned as an idle extension hunting group through system programming ( Hunting Group Set [100]). Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101]). This feature is also known as Station Hunting. Type Circular Hunting Description An idle extension is searched for in a circular fashion one time according to the numerical order of the jacks. Incoming call Busy Extn. Extn. Busy Extn. Busy Extn. Numerical order Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the numerical order of the jacks, until reaching the extension that is connected to the highest-numbered jack in the group. Incoming call Highestnumbered jack Extn. Busy Extn. Busy Extn. Busy Extn. Numerical order Conditions • • • • • Idle Extension Hunting applies to: Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls directed to a single extension. An extension can belong to only one extension group ( Extension Group [600]). One hunting type can be programmed for each extension group. If all the searched extensions are busy, a busy tone will be heard. A user can leave an idle extension hunting group temporarily by logging out of the group, and rejoin the group by logging back in ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). FWD/DND Mode When searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set FWD, DND, or Log-out will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)). However, if the extension that receives the call first has set FWD or DND, Idle Extension Hunting will not function and the call will be forwarded to the preprogrammed destination (when FWD is set) or will not be received at all (when DND is set). Feature Guide 23 1.2 Receiving Group Features • Message Waiting A message waiting indication will not be sent to an idle extension hunting destination. The MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on at the original destination only ( Message Waiting). Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Group 24 Feature Guide 1.17.1 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Description Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) distributes incoming calls to an idle member of the same extension group, if that group has been assigned as a UCD group through system programming ( UCD Group [520]). Available extensions are searched for in a circular fashion in numerical order. The UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension typically receives more calls than other extensions. [Example of UCD Group] The numbers found in circles below indicate calls and the order in which they arrived. Calls arrive at the UCD group. Queuing When the destination extension is busy or is logged out, the call waits in the queue and a UCD OGM is sent to the caller. Call Distribution Calls are distributed in the numerical order of the jacks. 3 Extn. A Extn. A receives the first call. Extn. B UCD starts searching from extn. B (Skips extn. A). Extn. C Extn. D When the second call arrives at extn. B, the third call will be directed to extn. C. Feature Guide 25 1.2 Receiving Group Features [Flowchart] A UCD call from an outside party is received. The call reaches the UCD group. Busy Rings (when an extension is available) A B UCD OGM (UCD Ring Time before Intercept expires) The call is established. Rings (when an extension is available) Music on Hold is sent to the caller. The call is not answered. Busy Is Intercept Routing employed? Yes Goes to B Did the UCD Busy Waiting Time expire? No Goes to A Intercept-Normal C Yes No The call is disconnected. The call is directed to another extension. What is the UCD Busy Mode ? Disconnect Disconnect-OGM The call is established. A UCD OGM is sent to the caller. Goes to C The call is disconnected. The call is disconnected. (UCD Ring Time after Intercept expires) Intercept-DISA A DISA OGM is sent to the caller. The call is not answered. The call is disconnected. Goes to DISA UCD Busy Mode When all extensions in a UCD group are busy, a call will wait for a preprogrammed length of time ( UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]). If this timer expires, the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways according to system programming ( UCD Busy Mode [523]): a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected immediately. b) Disconnect-OGM: The call is disconnected after a UCD outgoing message (OGM) plays (e.g., "We are still handling other calls. Please call back later."). c) Intercept-Normal: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations ( Flexible Ringing—Day/ Night/Lunch [408-410]). d) Intercept-DISA: The call is directed to the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) and the caller hears a DISA OGM (e.g., "Thank you for calling Company A. Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support."). 26 Feature Guide 1.2 Receiving Group Features UCD Intercept Mode When extensions in a UCD group are available but do not answer an outside (CO) line call within a preprogrammed length of time ( UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways according to system programming ( UCD Intercept Mode [524]): a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook. b) Intercept: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/ Lunch [408-410]). The extensions that receive the redirected call ring for a preprogrammed time period ( UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected. If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook. Conditions • • • • • • To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]). UCD OGM It is possible to select the UCD OGM sent to the caller when a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions in the group are busy ( UCD Waiting Message [527]). The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member of a group cannot log out. FWD/DND Mode When searching for an available extension, any extension that has set FWD—All Calls, FWD—Busy/ No Answer, or DND will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)). UCD Busy Waiting Time It is possible to assign the length of time ( UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]) the PBX holds an incoming outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy, and to assign the interval time between the repeated UCD OGMs ( UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]). Cyclic Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the UCD OGM is sent ( Cyclic Tone Detection [513]). Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside (CO) line call via UCD. Feature Guide References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.12.4 Music on Hold 2.2.2 Group Feature Guide 27 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Description A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All extensions in the DISA ring group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination ( DISA Built-in AA [501]) ring simultaneously. Delayed Ringing Each extension can be programmed for Delayed Ringing ( Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411413]), which allows extensions to be alerted to calls by flashing buttons only. Received calls can be answered even if they are not ringing. Extn. A Extn. B Extn. C Immediately ring simultaneously. Extn. D Delayed Ringing: Rings after a specified time delay. Conditions • • To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), and DISA AA service must be assigned as the destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member of a group cannot log out. Feature Guide References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 2.2.2 Group 28 Feature Guide 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out Description Members of an idle extension hunting group, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group, or Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) groups manually. Group members can log in at the beginning of a work shift when they are ready to answer calls, and log out at the end of the work shift. Conditions • • • The last member of a group cannot log out. While logged out from a group, a member extension will not receive calls to that group via the DISA, UCD, or Idle Extension Hunting features. Log-in/Log-out Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Log-in/Log-out button. It shows the current status as follows: Light Pattern Status Red on Logged out Off Logged in Feature Guide References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.5.4 Leaving a Group (Log-in/Log-out) Feature Guide 29 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW Description When an extension user cannot answer calls (is on a call, out of the office, etc.), it is possible to forward or refuse calls directed to that extension using the following features: 1. Call Forwarding (FWD) 2. Do Not Disturb (DND) 1. FWD Extension users can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations ( (FWD)). 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding 2. DND An extension user can send a DND tone to let the caller know that he or she is not available ( Do Not Disturb (DND)). 1.3.1.3 Conditions • FWD/DND Button If a proprietary telephone (PT) does not have an FWD/DND button, a flexible CO button can be customised as an FWD/DND button. [Button Status] The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows: Light Pattern • Red on DND on Slow red flashing FWD on Off FWD/DND off Setting a new FWD mode, such as All Calls or Busy/No Answer, or the DND feature, clears the status of the previous FWD mode or DND feature. Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons 30 Status Feature Guide 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Description Extension users can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are 4 Call Forwarding (FWD) modes, described below. Mode Description All Calls All calls are forwarded to another extension. Busy/No Answer Calls are forwarded when the extension user's line is busy, or when the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time period. To Outside (CO) Line All calls are forwarded to an outside party, provided this feature is enabled for each extension through system programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). Follow Me When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving his or her desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension. Forwarded to: Extension 1. Another Extension 2. Outside Party Incoming Intercom Calls/ Outside (CO) Line Calls 3. VPS 4. BV [Available Destinations] Destination Availability Extension (proprietary telephone [PT]/single line telephone [SLT]) – Automatic Line Access no. + Phone no. Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is enabled for the extension through system programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). Outside (CO) Line Group Access no. + Outside (CO) Line Group no. + Phone no. Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is enabled for the extension through system programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). Voice Processing System (VPS) – Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature no. Only available when the BV feature is enabled for the extension through system programming ( BV for Extension [622]). Conditions [General] • • This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall and Camp-on Recall. The types of calls that are forwarded by this feature are: Feature Guide 31 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Call Type • • • • Outside (CO) line calls Normal except FWD to Outside (CO) Line, Direct In Line (DIL), Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Intercom calls Extension, Transfer Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) When searching for an available extension within a UCD group, any extension that has set FWD will be skipped. However, if the last extension that can receive a call has set FWD, the call will be forwarded to that extension's call forwarding destination. The last member of a UCD group cannot log out. When a call is forwarded, the corresponding message waiting indication is not forwarded. The MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on only at the originally called extension ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). It is programmable whether the calls received on outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) are forwarded for each extension or not ( Call Forwarding Selection [963]). If FWD is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is a VPS or Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) and the extension has been assigned to ring with other extensions, the VPS or TAM may answer the call before other extensions can answer it. To prevent this, disable FWD. A call can only be automatically forwarded one time. In the example below, extension A's calls are being forwarded to extension B. If extension B tries to set FWD to extension C, the extension B user hears a reorder tone and the setting is denied. If extension B has already set FWD to extension C, and extension A tries to set FWD to extension B, the setting is also denied. A B • A C B C The destination of an extension's forwarded calls can call or transfer calls to the original extension. FWD—All Calls Incoming call Call or transfer a call Original FWD destination [Busy/No Answer] • No Answer Time The length of time before calls are forwarded is programmable for each extension ( Start Time [202]). Call Forwarding [To Outside (CO) Line] • FWD to Outside (CO) Line System programming determines the extensions that can forward all intercom calls and certain outside (CO) line calls to an outside party ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). These outside (CO) line calls must arrive on outside (CO) lines whose programming ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) is one of the following: a) DIL 32 Feature Guide 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features b) DISA (only when the call is directly sent to an extension, not intercepted) c) UCD (when only one member belongs to the group) • • Outside (CO) Line Call Duration If a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected. User Manual References 1.5.1 Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD]) 1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV]) 1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 33 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Description Extension users can use this feature to prevent calls from ringing at their extension. The calling extension will hear a Do Not Disturb (DND) tone. Conditions • • • DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by extensions that are allowed to override DND through system programming ( DND Override [609]). This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall and Timed Reminder. Calls from outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" or "DIL" ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) can be received at a user's extension, but the telephone will not ring. The corresponding CO button will flash when an outside (CO) line call is received, and the user can answer the call by pressing this button. User Manual References 1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.7.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND]) 34 Feature Guide 1.4 Answering Features 1.4 Answering Features 1.4.1 Answering Features 1.4.1.1 Answering Features—OVERVIEW Description An extension user can answer incoming calls using the following methods: Called Extension Feature Description Details in Line Preference— Incoming A user can select the line seized when going • 1.4.1.2 Line off-hook. Preference— Incoming Direct One-touch Answering A user can answer an incoming call simply – by pressing the flashing CO or INTERCOM button. Hands-free Answerback A user can answer calls automatically and establish a hands-free conversation. • 1.4.1.4 Handsfree Answerback Receiving Calls A user's own extension (single line telephone [SLT]) A user can answer an incoming call simply by going off-hook. – Another extension • 1.4.1.3 Call A user can pick up a call to a specific extension, a call within the user's extension Pickup group, or a call received by a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) extension. A user's own extension (proprietary telephone [PT]) Call Pickup Feature Guide 35 1.4 Answering Features 1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming Description A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following 3 line preferences. Each of these line preferences can be selected by each extension through personal programming (Line Preference—Incoming). Type Description No Line A user can select a line by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line Access button to answer an incoming call after going off-hook. Prime Line A user can answer a call arriving at a flexible CO button (assigned as the "Prime Line") simply by going off-hook. Ringing Line (default) A user can answer a call ringing at one's own telephone simply by going off-hook. Conditions • • • • • Ringing methods can be selected from among immediate, delayed, no ringing, or no incoming calls (disable) through system programming ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]). A single line telephone (SLT) user can select "Ringing Line" mode only. A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO], Group-CO [G-CO] or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference. Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference. In "Prime Line" mode, if a PT user receives an incoming call on a line other than the "Prime Line", the user must go off-hook and then press the corresponding flashing CO button to answer the call. User Manual References 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 36 Feature Guide 1.4 Answering Features 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup Description An extension user can answer a call ringing at another extension by entering the appropriate feature numbers. The following types of Call Pickup are available: Type Description Directed Call Pickup A call to a specific extension is answered. Group Call Pickup A call to an extension in the same extension group ( [600]) is answered. Extension Group Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) A call received by a preprogrammed TAM extension ( [611]) is answered. TAM Extension Call Pickup Deny An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension. If this feature is enabled, other users will hear a reorder tone when trying to pick up calls. Conditions [Directed/Group Call Pickup] • • Call Pickup applies to: Intercom calls (except calls from Hold Recall and Camp-on Recall), outside (CO) line calls, and doorphone calls (even when the extension is not assigned as a destination for doorphone calls.) An extension user will hear a confirmation tone when he or she picks up the call with the Directed Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Call Pickup Tone [117]). [Group Call Pickup] • By setting system programming ( Pickup Group [127]) in advance, an extension user can pick up a call to an extension in the same extension group simply by going off-hook even when his or her extension is not ringing. User Manual References 1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup) Feature Guide 37 1.4 Answering Features 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback Description A user with a speakerphone-equipped proprietary telephone (PT) can answer intercom calls automatically without lifting the handset. When a call is received at an extension that is in Hands-free Answerback mode, the caller hears a confirmation tone and the called extension hears a beep tone. Then the conversation is automatically established. Conditions • • Hands-free Answerback applies to: Intercom calls (not including outside (CO) line calls or doorphone calls) When an outside (CO) line call is transferred to an extension, this feature is overridden and a ring tone is heard. Feature Guide References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call User Manual References 1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback) 38 Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.1 Intercom Call Features 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call Description An extension user can call another extension user. Conditions • • • • • • Extension Number/Name Assignment Extension numbers ( Extension Number [009]) and names ( Extension Name [604], Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]) can be assigned to all extensions. During intercom calls, the number and name of the other extension are shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs). DSS Button It is possible to call another extension simply by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection (DSS) button ( DSS Off-hook Mode [126]). A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can be customised as a DSS button. The DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also be used. Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party can talk to the user immediately after hearing a confirmation tone. Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice A caller can change the called party's preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. This setting is active for the current call only, after which it reverts to the called party's previous setting. The extension ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls can be selected through system programming ( Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]). The ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside (CO) line calls can also be selected through system programming ( Ringback Tone Pattern [128]). Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following: Type Description Ringback Tone Indicates the call is being received at the called party's extension. Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice-calling. Busy Tone Indicates the called party's extension is busy. DND Tone Indicates the called party has set Do Not Disturb (DND). Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones Feature Guide 39 1.5 Making Call Features User Manual References 1.2.1 Basic Calling 1.2.5 Switching the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice) 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 40 Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 Outside (CO) Line Call Features Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW Description An extension user can use the following features when making an outside (CO) line call: Feature Description Details in Emergency Call A user can dial preprogrammed emergency • 1.5.2.2 Emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on Call the extension. Account Code Entry A user can enter an account code to identify • 1.5.2.3 Account outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes. Code Entry Pulse to Tone Conversion A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to • 1.5.2.4 Dial Type DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) mode if Selection necessary. Pause Insertion A dialling pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button, or can be automatically inserted after a user-dialled code, such as a Host PBX Access code or Automatic Pause Insertion code. The length of the pause can be specified through system programming. • 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion • 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Feature Guide 41 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call Description An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers ( Emergency Number [309]) after seizing an outside (CO) line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension. Conditions • • 42 If the PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, an extension user must dial the Host PBX Access code after the Outside (CO) Line Access number. This feature will function even when: – In Account Code—Verify-All/Verify-Toll/Forced mode ( 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry) – Restricted by the current class of service (COS) ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)) – In Extension Lock ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock) Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry Description An account code is used to identify outgoing outside (CO) line calls for accounting and billing purposes. Account codes are appended to SMDR call records ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), and have several uses. For example, a firm can use an account code for each client to determine which calls were made for which client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client's account code as shown on the SMDR call record. There are 4 methods of entering account codes, explained below. One method is assigned to each extension through system programming ( Account Code Mode [605]). Mode Description Option An extension user can (but is not required to) enter a 4-digit account code during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation ends when a record is needed. Forced An extension user must always enter a 4-digit account code within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line. This method ensures that extension users will not forget to enter account codes. Verify-All An extension user must always enter a preprogrammed account code ( Account Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line. If the entered code does not match any preprogrammed code, the user will hear a reorder tone. Verify-Toll An extension user can enter a preprogrammed account code ( Account Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line to override TRS ( 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code). Classes of service (COSs) 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to COS 2. COSs 1 and 2 will not be affected. If the entered account code is also registered as an extension password, the extension password feature will be given priority. The COS of the corresponding extension will be applied. Conditions • • • An account code can be stored in Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling, Hot Line, Speed Dialling— System/Personal, Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line, etc.). In this case, the Account Code feature number and specified account code must be entered after the Outside (CO) Line Access number. An extension user does not need to enter an account code for incoming outside (CO) line calls. Even in Forced/Verify-All/Verify-Toll mode, emergency calls can be made without an account code ( 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call). User Manual References 1.2.1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 43 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection Description The dialling mode can be selected for each outside (CO) line through system programming ( Dial Mode [401]) regardless of the originating extension (dependent on the contract with the telephone company). Mode Description DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency) Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO) line using tones. If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, select this mode as necessary. Pulse (Rotary) Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO) line using pulses. Call Blocking If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the contract specifies Pulse lines, select this mode. When dialling with a touch-tone telephone, only Pulse signals will be sent to the telephone company. Conditions • • • • • Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed [402] is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside (CO) lines is Call Blocking. If your telephone company can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority: Pulse (Low) Pulse (High) DTMF Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to access special services such as computer-accessed long-distance calling or voice mail services. To switch to DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period after the outside (CO) line is connected, or press the " #" key. This feature functions only on outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode ( Dial Mode [401]). DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode. The pulse rate for outside (CO) lines that have been set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode ( Pulse Speed [402]) should be selected depending on your telephone company. There are 2 pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps). It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have been set to "DTMF" mode ( DTMF Time [210]). It is programmable whether DTMF dialling is sent to the telephone company when an extension user redials after changing from Pulse mode to DTMF mode by pressing the " #" key ( Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]). User Manual References 1.4.9 Changing the Dialling Mode (Pulse to Tone Conversion) 44 Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit Description The PBX can detect the reverse signal sent from the telephone company when an extension user tries to make an outside (CO) line call. This detects the start (the called party goes off-hook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside (CO) line call. The duration of the call can be verified with SMDR using this feature ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). This feature is also known as Polarity Reverse Detection. Conditions • If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line ( Polarity Reverse Detection [424]), the PBX will automatically start the timer ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the outside party answers the call. Feature Guide 45 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion Description A dialling pause of a preprogrammed length can be inserted manually or automatically when dialling. Manual Pause Insertion: A pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button. Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted after the user dials any one of the following numbers: a) Outside (CO) Line Access number b) Automatic Pause Insertion code c) Host PBX Access code ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) Conditions • • 46 The pause length is programmable for each outside (CO) line ( Pause Time [417]). When a dialled telephone number matches one of the Automatic Pause Insertion codes assigned through system programming ( Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]), a pause will be automatically inserted after the code. This is particularly convenient if a second dial tone is sent from your telephone company. Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Description This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension jacks of the host PBX to outside (CO) line ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code, assigned through system programming ( Host PBX Access Code [403]), is required to access the telephone company from the host PBX. The Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*1, or 81 through 88) of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code for each outside (CO) line of this PBX. A pause of a preprogrammed length ( Pause Time [417]) will be automatically inserted after the user-dialled Host PBX Access code. [Example] Telephone Company Host PBX Access Code for PBX, or Automatic Line Access No. for Host PBX: 0 Host PBX Outside Party (01-23-4567) Automatic Line Access No.: 9 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Outside (CO) line 1 Dials "0-01-23-4567". Host PBX Access Code PBX Telephone No. Dials "9-0-01-23-4567". Automatic Line Access No. Telephone No. Host PBX Access Code Dials "9-101". Automatic Line Access No. Extn. No. of the Host PBX Note In this example, "0" should be assigned as the Host PBX Access code for outside (CO) line 1 of this PBX. *1 For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9. Feature Guide 47 1.5 Making Call Features Conditions • • • 48 Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)). TRS TRS checks only the dialled telephone number, excluding the Host PBX Access code, when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). SMDR The Host PBX Access code can be logged by SMDR along with the dialled number when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.3 1.5.3.1 Seizing a Line Features Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW Description A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the line that is seized in order to make a call, using one of the following features: Feature Description Details in Line Preference—Outgoing A user can select the line to be seized when going off- • 1.5.3.2 Line hook. Preference— Outgoing Outside (CO) Line Access A user can select the Outside (CO) Line Access method used when making outside (CO) line calls. • 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Feature Guide 49 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing Description Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of seizing a line (Line Preference—Outgoing) to be used each time the user goes off-hook. Method Description Idle Line When a user goes off-hook, an idle outside (CO) line is selected automatically from among the assigned outside (CO) lines ( Automatic Designated Line Access [419]). No Line When a user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to make a call, the user must select the desired line manually. Prime Line When a user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically. Conditions • • • • • A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO], Group-CO [G-CO], or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference. Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference. Line Preference Override A user can override the preset line preference temporarily by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line Access button before going off-hook. System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode ( Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]). It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection [400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that are not connected. User Manual References 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 50 Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Description There are 3 methods of accessing an outside (CO) line. Method Automatic Line Access (Local Access) Description Operation Selects an idle outside (CO) line automatically from the assigned outside (CO) lines ( Automatic Designated Line Access [419]). If Idle Line Preference ( 1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing) is set on the extension through personal programming, the user can access an idle line simply by going off-hook. Dial the Automatic Line Access number (9/0)* ( Automatic Line Access [121]). Note * For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9. Outside (CO) Line Group Access Selects an idle outside (CO) line from Dial the Outside (CO) Line Group the corresponding outside (CO) line Access number and an outside group. (CO) line group number, or press a Group-CO (G-CO) button. S-CO Line Access Selects the desired outside (CO) line Press the Single-CO (S-CO) directly. button. Line Access Using the Other-CO (O-CO) Button To select an idle outside (CO) line from among the outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or GCO buttons, the proprietary telephone (PT) user can press the O-CO button. Conditions • • The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Dialling Start Time [206]) after seizing an outside (CO) line before dialling. Button Assignment A flexible CO button can be customised as an S-CO, G-CO, or O-CO button as follows: Type • Assignable parameter Single-CO (S-CO) A specified outside (CO) line is assigned (Default: CO 1–CO 8). Group-CO (G-CO) An outside (CO) line group is assigned ( [404]). Other-CO (O-CO) Outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons are assigned. CO Line Group Number The same outside (CO) line group can be assigned to more than one G-CO button on the same PT. The same outside (CO) line can be assigned to an S-CO button and a G-CO button. Dialling the Outside (CO) Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority: S-CO G-CO O-CO Once a flexible CO button is assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button, it indicates line status with a variety of light patterns ( 1.18.3 LED Indication). Direct Outside (CO) Line Access If a PT user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the PT automatically enables hands-free Feature Guide 51 1.5 Making Call Features • • • operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE or MONITOR button. Outside (CO) Line Hunting Order for Automatic Line Access The outside (CO) line hunting sequence (from highest-numbered outside (CO) line, or in rotation) for Automatic Line Access can be determined through system programming ( Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]). System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode ( Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]). It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection [400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that are not connected. Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.2.1 Basic Calling 52 Feature Guide 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1.1 Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW Description An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX. A stored number can be dialled by a simple operation. 1. Features Feature Storage Method One-touch Dialling Details in Personal Programming, System Programming • 1.6.1.2 Onetouch Dialling KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling System Programming • 1.6.1.3 KXT7710 One-touch Dialling Redial • 1.6.1.4 Redial Last Number The last or most recently dialled number is automatically stored. Speed Dialling Saved Number While in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, the current telephone number can be manually stored and redialled afterwards. Personal Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling— System Programming Personal/System System Quick Dialling System Programming • 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling Hot Line Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Incoming Call Log Caller ID information is automatically stored. • 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log 2. Valid Input Displayed while Entering Input Description 0–9/ /# 0–9/ /# Store digits, , and # by pressing the corresponding buttons. PAUSE (Pause) P Store a dialling pause by pressing the PAUSE button ( 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion). Feature Guide 53 1.6 Memory Dialling Features Displayed while Entering Input Description FLASH/RECALL (Hooking)*1 F Store an EFA signal (EFA mode) by pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the number ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)). INTERCOM (Secret)*1 [/] Hide all or part of the System Speed Dialling number or One-touch Dialling number from the display by pressing the INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be hidden (Secret Dialling). It is programmable whether the hidden part will be shown on SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). CONF (Hyphen)*2 - Store a hyphen by pressing the CONF button. *1 *2 Available only when in system/personal programming mode Available only when in system programming mode [Example of Secret Dialling] When storing the number "91234567890", to hide the telephone number "1234567890", Enter 9 Notes • • INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM . The characters for secret code, "[" and "]" (entered by pressing the INTERCOM button), are counted as one digit each. It is not possible to hide the Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*, or 81 through 88) by pressing the INTERCOM button before dialling it. * For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9. Conditions • 54 Outside (CO) Line Access by Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling/System Speed Dialling) A specific Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is performed after selecting an outside (CO) line, the stored Outside (CO) Line Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected outside (CO) line. Feature Guide 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling Description A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is possible by storing the number (up to 24 digits), such as an extension number, telephone number, account code, or feature number, in a One-touch Dialling button. Conditions • • • One-touch Dialling Button A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS)/Programmable Feature (PF)/MESSAGE button can be customised as a One-touch Dialling button. A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it in 2 One-touch Dialling buttons. Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the PF buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers. Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number "0", and vice versa. Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.2.2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 55 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Description The MESSAGE button and each of the 8 One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 single line telephone (SLT) can be customised to dial an extension number, telephone number, or feature number (up to 24 digits) when the user presses that button. To allow easy configuration of multiple extensions, every KX-T7710 connected to the PBX can be customised with the same settings at once, through system programming ( KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]). This is useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications. The KX-T7710 has 2 modes, "NORMAL" mode and "PBX" mode, selected by a switch on the telephone. This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in "PBX" mode. [Programming Example: KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling] Location No. Button Desired Number 1 One-touch Dial 01 100 (Front Desk) 2 One-touch Dial 02 76XX (Wake-up Call) 3 One-touch Dial 03 102 (Restaurant) (Cont.) : : : : : : 9 MESSAGE 784# Conditions • • • • • • System programming determines the SLTs that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]). If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message simply by pressing the MESSAGE button because the button includes the default value of Message Waiting Answer feature number. Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for Personal Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function. KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is available to users while hearing a dial tone. KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is not available to users when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone (PT). Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information. Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.2.2 Easy Dialling 56 Feature Guide 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1.4 Redial Description There are 2 types of Redial, described below. Type Description Last Number Redial Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled, allowing the same number to be easily redialled. Saved Number Redial A proprietary telephone (PT) user can save a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later. The saved number is kept until a new number is stored. Automatic Redial If Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, the number will be automatically redialled a preprogrammed number of times ( Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]) at a preprogrammed interval ( Automatic Redial Interval [114]). This feature is only available on PT models that have an SP-PHONE or MONITOR button. Conditions [General] • • • Up to 64 digits plus the Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored and redialled for each Redial type. Automatic Redial is cancelled if any other number is dialled, or if an incoming call is answered. Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature. [Last Number Redial] • The stored telephone number is replaced whenever a new number is dialled. [Saved Number Redial] • Save Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Save button. Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.2.3 Redialling Feature Guide 57 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System Description An extension user can use short numbers to frequently dialled numbers that are stored in the PBX, either in the extension's Personal Speed Dialling or in System Speed Dialling. Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling. Conditions [General] • • Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Personal Speed Dialling (up to 24 digits) and System Speed Dialling (up to 32 digits). This feature is not available on rotary single line telephones (SLTs). [Personal Speed Dialling] • Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the Programmable Feature (PF) buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers. Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number "0", and vice versa. [System Speed Dialling] • • • • TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]) Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the class of service (COS) of System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). System Speed Dialling numbers ( System Speed Dialling Number [001]) and names ( System Speed Dialling Name [011]) can be assigned through system programming. The assigned name will be shown on the display of a proprietary telephone (PT) when an extension user makes calls using this feature. Caller's Name If the dialled number matches a number stored in the System Speed Dialling table with an assigned name, the assigned name will be shown on the display ( 1.16.1 Caller ID). System Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination. User Manual References 1.2.2 Easy Dialling 3.3.2 System Programming 58 Feature Guide 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling Description Using Quick Dialling, an extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is possible by storing the number (up to 10 digits), such as extension number, telephone number, or feature number, for Quick Dialling through system programming ( Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]). [Programming Example: Quick Dialling] Code No. Desired Number 50 #34 51 #43 (Cont.) : : : : 59 912345678 In this example: a) The feature number for Paging—External, "#34", is stored with the code number "50". Users can make paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "50". b) The feature number for Paging—Answer, "#43", is stored with the code number "51". Users can answer paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "51". c) A telephone number, "912345678", is stored with the code number "59". Users can call this outside number by going off-hook and then dialling "59". Conditions • This feature is available when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009] ( Feature Numbering). 2.3.4 User Manual References 1.2.2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 59 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Description A single line telephone (SLT) user can make an outgoing call to a previously stored telephone number (up to 32 digits) simply by going off-hook. If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a special dial tone (dial tone 2) is generated for a preprogrammed time period ( Hot Line Waiting Time [203]), and then dialling starts. During this waiting time, the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature. This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling. Conditions • • This feature cannot be programmed on rotary SLTs. This feature will not function when the extension user goes off-hook to answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold. User Manual References 1.2.2 Easy Dialling 60 Feature Guide 1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features 1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features 1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) Description If the selected outside (CO) line is busy when a call is made, the caller can choose to be informed by a callback ring (Camp-on Recall) when the line becomes free. When the user answers the callback ring: For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing without the user having to redial. For an outside (CO) line call: The line is seized. Conditions • • If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds (4 rings), the callback is cancelled. More than one extension user can set this feature to monitor the same destination extension or outside (CO) line at the same time. User Manual References 1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer Feature Guide 61 1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features 1.7.2 Executive Busy Override Description An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call. Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user. Conditions • • • System programming determines extension users who can use Executive Busy Override ( Executive Busy Override [608]). This feature will not function when the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security). When a 2-party conversation is changed to a 3-party conference call, a confirmation tone will be sent to all parties ( 1.13.1.2 Conference). It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]). User Manual References 1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.7.4 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny) 62 Feature Guide 1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features 1.7.3 Call Waiting Tone Description When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a conversation), a call waiting tone will be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting. Conditions • • This feature functions only if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone. One of 2 call waiting tones can be selected through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). Feature Guide References 1.1.3.5 Call Waiting 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones User Manual References 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 63 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) Description Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorised outside (CO) line calls. Every extension is assigned to one of 5 classes of service (COSs) for each time service mode ( TRSCOS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]); COS 1 grants the highest level of authorisation, allowing all outside (CO) line calls to be made, and COS 5 grants the lowest level of authorisation. COSs 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls with a combination of preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables, explained below. Denied Code Tables ( TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]) Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the telephone numbers that are restricted. All outgoing outside (CO) line calls made by COS 2 through 5 users are compared to the applicable Denied Code Table(s), and when the leading number of a dialled telephone number (not including the Outside (CO) Line Access number) matches an entry found in an applicable table, the call is denied. Up to a total of 80 denied codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored. Exception Code Tables ( TRS—Exception Code [306]) Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers that are checked against every dialled number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a dialled number is prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to the applicable Exception Code Table(s). If the dialled number matches an entry found in an applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted. Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored. The available number of codes depends on the COS assigned to each extension. Applicable tables by COS The Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables that apply to each COS are listed below. COS No. Exception Code Tables No restriction. (Not Programmable) No restriction. (Not Programmable) 20 denied codes programmed in [302]. (Table for Class 2) 80 exception codes (code numbers 01–80) programmed in [306]. (Tables for Classes 2 through 5) 3 40 denied codes programmed in [302] and [303]. (Tables for Classes 2 and 3) 60 exceptions codes (code numbers 01–60) programmed in [306]. (Tables for Classes 3 through 5 ) 4 60 denied codes programmed in [302] through [304]. (Tables for Classes 2 through 4) 40 exception codes (code numbers 01–40) programmed in [306]. (Tables for Classes 4 and 5) 5 80 denied codes programmed in [302] through [305]. (Tables for Classes 2 through 5) 20 exception codes (code numbers 01–20) programmed in [306]. (Table for Class 5) 1 2 64 Denied Code Tables Feature Guide 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features COS 1 All outside (CO) line calls permitted. COS 2 Class 2 restriction Class 2 – 5 exceptions COS 3 Class 2 – 3 restrictions Class 3 – 5 exceptions COS 4 Class 2 – 4 restrictions Class 4 – 5 exceptions COS 5 Class 2 – 5 restrictions Class 5 exception Calls are restricted Calls are permitted TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]) Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension. If, for example, the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers is assigned as "2", the PBX will allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 1 and 2, but not allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 3, 4, and 5 according to TRS as follows: System Speed Dialling Class COS No. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Permitted Feature Guide 65 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features [Flowchart] An extension user tries to make an outside (CO) line call. Was the number dialled using System Speed Dialling? Yes No Yes Is the COS number higher than the System Speed Dialling Class? No or Equal What is the COS number? COS 1 COSs 2–5 Is the dialled number found in an applicable Denied Code Table? No Yes Is the dialled number found in an applicable Exception Code Table? Yes No The call is denied. The user hears a reorder tone. The call is permitted. Conditions WARNING The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes. KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA. • • 66 Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire services, should be stored ( Emergency Number [309]) so that they are not barred by TRS. Host PBX Access Code/Carrier Exception Code TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialled using a Host PBX Access code ( Feature Guide 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Carrier Exception code. Access Code is stored in the PBX Access Code Type Access Code is dialled • • Access Code is not stored in the PBX Host PBX Access Code*1 TRS ignores the code and checks the remaining digits. Number dialled is not an TRS checks the entire outside (CO) line call, so number. TRS does not check the number. Carrier Exception Code*2 TRS ignores the code and checks the remaining digits. TRS checks the entire number. *1 *2 • Access Code is not dialled TRS checks the entire number. Host PBX Access Code [403] Carrier Exception Code [300] The inter-digit timer ( Inter-digit Time [208]) applies until the TRS check is completed. When the timer expires, the outgoing outside (CO) line call is disconnected while dialling, if enabled through system programming ( No Dial Disconnection [211]). For a single line telephone (SLT), an outgoing outside (CO) line call will be released from the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) receiver when the inter-digit timer expires. The COS of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock) can be assigned ( TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked extension can make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS of locked extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4. The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain nondigits ( or #) ( TRS Check for * and # [125]). If TRS check is disabled, the PBX ignores any nondigits that are dialled when checking, which is useful in preventing some unauthorised calls. Feature Guide References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Feature Guide 67 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code Description An extension user can override TRS temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). The extension user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialling the telephone number ( Account Code [310]). [Flowchart] TRS Override by Account Code is attempted. Option/ Forced Verify–All What is the account code mode? Verify–Toll Does the entered account code match an extension password? Yes Does the entered account code match a stored account code? Yes No No No Does the entered account code match a stored account code? Yes Yes Is the COS number "1"? No The call is established with COS 2. The call is established with the COS number of the corresponding extension. The COS number remains the same as that of the extension being used. 68 Feature Guide The call is denied. The user hears a reorder tone. 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features Conditions • • • • This feature functions only for extensions whose: – Account code mode is set to "Verify-Toll" ( Account Code Mode [605]). – Class of service (COS) number is set to 3 through 5. If the extension user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid account code, an ordinary TRS check is performed. System programming determines whether SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)) logs the 4-digit account code or the 2-digit index of the account code when an extension user makes a call using this feature ( SMDR Account Code [805]). It is also possible to override TRS at another extension using the Walking COS feature ( 1.8.4 Walking COS). Feature Guide References 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry Feature Guide 69 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 1.8.3 Extension Lock Description Extension users can lock their telephones to prevent unauthorised use. This is useful for situations when extension users must leave their desks temporarily. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock and unlock an extension. This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout. Conditions • • • • Remote Extension Lock An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely lock or unlock an extension using a Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. This feature functions only if the operator or manager has set the extension password. When the operator or manager locks an extension remotely, the extension's user cannot unlock it. When a user locks an extension, the operator or manager extension can override the lock and unlock the extension. This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control. The class of service (COS) of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature can be assigned ( TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked extension can make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS of locked extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4. Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions simultaneously. This feature also functions as Incoming Call Log Display Lock ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator and manager. Feature Guide References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) User Manual References 1.5.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Lock) 2.1.1 Locking Other Extensions (Remote Extension Lock) 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode 70 Feature Guide 1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 1.8.4 Walking COS Description Extension users can temporarily assign their own class of service (COS) to another extension, allowing them to make calls as if from their own telephones. This feature is useful when a manager or supervisor needs to borrow another employee's telephone to make a call. The superior enters the extension password followed by the Walking COS feature number and his or her extension number, and then makes the call. The same privileges and restrictions normally applied to a user are applied when using Walking COS. Conditions • When making a call with Walking COS, the extension number of the Walking COS user's extension is also logged by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) User Manual References 1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS) 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 71 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Description The PBX automatically selects the least expensive route (carrier) available at the time a long-distance call is made on an outside (CO) line that has Automatic Route Selection (ARS) enabled. In order to use ARS effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell the PBX which calls should be placed using which carriers. 72 Feature Guide 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features [Flowchart] A long-distance call is made. A Is (another) one digit dialled within the ARS Inter-digit Time? No Yes Each time a digit is dialled, the PBX checks the dialled number (other than Host PBX Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and First Carrier Access code). Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code? Yes Reorder tone No The dialled number is sent to the telephone company. Is the dialled number an Emergency Call number? Yes No Yes Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code? Reorder tone No *1 Does the dialled number include the First Carrier Access code? Yes The dialled number (other than the First Carrier Access code) is sent to the telephone company. No Checks the Routing Plan Table (1–4) to determine which carrier to use. *4 *3 *2 Does the leading number match the Route 1–4 Selection Code? Yes Does the leading number match the Route 1–4 Exception Code? No Digits are removed from the dialled number as required. Yes No *5 Digits are added to the dialled number as required. Are 7 digits (other than Host PBX Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and First Carrier Access code) dialled? *6 The corresponding Routing Plan Table is selected. No Yes The dialled number is sent to the telephone company. Goes to A Feature Guide 73 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features [Programming Procedures] 1. ARS Mode ( ARS Selection [350]) Turn on ARS for each outside (CO) line. 2. First Carrier Access Code*1 Enter the carrier's access code, such as the Host PBX Access code ( Host PBX Access Code [403]), Carrier Exception code ( Carrier Exception Code [300]), or First Carrier Access code ( 1st Carrier Selection Code [359]). For example, if the dialled number is "000-93-425-9477" and the First Carrier Access code is assigned as "000", the modified number is "93-425-9477". Consult your carrier for more information. 3. Routing Plan Table Leading Number*2 ( Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]) Store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS. Leading Number Exception*3 ( Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]) Store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS here. Note that the Outside (CO) Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here. Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected via the default carrier for that line. Removed Number of Digits*4 ( ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]) There may be circumstances where the user-dialled number must be modified in order for the carrier to connect the call. In this case, store the number of digits to be removed automatically from the beginning of the dialled number here. Added Number*5 ( ARS Modification—Added Number [361]) Store the number to be added automatically to the beginning of the dialled number here. ARS Outside (CO) Line Group*6 ( ARS CO Line Group [364]) When making outside (CO) line calls using the Automatic Line Access number (9/0)*, assign the outside (CO) line group(s) for each Routing Plan number here. An outside (CO) line belonging to the assigned outside (CO) line group(s) is automatically seized when making calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the dialled number is applied to one of the Routing Plan numbers. Note * For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9. First Carrier Outside (CO) Line 1 2 Group 1 Feature Guide Second Carrier 050 (Long-distance Call) Third Carrier 05000 (International Call) Mobile Jack PBX 74 Local Call 3 Group 2 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features [Programming Example: Routing Plan Table] Modification *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 Routing Plan No. Leading No.*1 Leading No. Exception*2 1 4,5 2 Removed No. of Digits*3 Added No.*4 ARS Outside (CO) Line Group*5 07 0 050 All 9,0 07 0 050 1 3 07 Not Stored 2 05000 1 4 6 Not Stored 0 Not Stored 2 Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360] ARS Modification—Added Number [361] ARS CO Line Group [364] In this example: Dialled Number Modified Number Description 9-43-425-9477 050-43-425-9477 A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9". 9-54-123-4567 050-54-123-4567 A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9". 9-93-425-9477 050-93-425-9477 A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2. 9-04-123-4567 050-04-123-4567 A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2. 9-07-81-92-477-1450 050-00-81-92-477-1450 An international call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 3. 9-6-123456 6-123456 A mobile telephone call via outside (CO) line group 2 is made using Routing Plan 4. 4. Authorisation Code & Itemised Billing Code Table Authorisation Code ( Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]) An Authorisation code for each carrier can be assigned for each outside (CO) line, if required by the carrier. The registered codes are not shown on proprietary telephone (PT) displays or System Data Dump printouts ( System Data Dump [804]) after programming, but "Already Set" will be shown instead. Itemised Billing Code ( Itemised Billing Code [389]) An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension. It is possible to add the Itemised Billing code assigned to an extension to the Authorisation code for the carrier for each outside (CO) line through system programming ( Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]). Feature Guide 75 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features Sequence of Transmitted Code ( Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]) The sequence of transmitted codes (C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing Code; H: Telephone Number) can be selected. When "C.I.A.H" is selected, the dialled numbers of Itemised Billing Code (I) and Authorisation Code (A) are shown on the displays of PTs and SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). [Programming Example: Authorisation & Itemised Billing Code Table] Modification Authorisation Code*1 Routing Plan No. Leading No. 1 8 0 11223344 0123456789 (on CO 1/2) 2 5 0 11223344PPPP #012345 (PPPP: 6 s, #: Pulse to Tone Conversion ( 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection)) 67890123456 Enable (on CO 1) 789 (on CO 1) (Itemised Billing Code: Extn. 101) Removed No. of Digits Added No. Itemised Billing*2 Enable (on CO 1/2) (Itemised Billing Code: Extn. 101) Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] *1 *2 In this example: Dialled Number 9-893-425-9477 (Extn. 101) Modified Number Pulse*1 Tone 11223344-P*2-0123456789-101-893-425-9477 Added No. Pulse*1 ( Authorisation Itemised Telephone Code Billing Code No. Dial Mode [401]) P (Pause)*2 ( 9-593-425-9477 (Extn. 101) 76 Feature Guide Pause Time [417]) Description A call via provider access is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9". The Authorisation code and the Itemised Billing code are transmitted in tone mode. The pause time is automatically inserted before entering the Authorisation code. A call via provider access is made using 11223344-PPPP-012345-P-67890123456789-101-593-425-9477 Routing Plan 2 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to Added No. Authorisation Itemised Telephone "9". Code Billing Code No. Pulse Tone 1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features Conditions WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes. KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA. • • • • • ARS Inter-digit Time The inter-digit time used while the PBX is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature can be specified through system programming ( ARS Inter-digit Time [363]). TRS TRS checks are performed before ARS number modification, so programme TRS Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables accordingly ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). If an extension user makes calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the leading number of a dialled telephone number does not match any entries found in the Leading Number, an outside (CO) line enabled in Automatic Designated Line Access [419] is automatically seized. The PBX checks the number repeatedly until 7 digits have been dialled. If an extension user makes an outside (CO) line call by directly pressing a Single-CO (S-CO), GroupCO (G-CO), or Other-CO (O-CO) button or by dialling an assigned Outside (CO) Line Group Access number, and the seized outside (CO) line has been enabled in ARS Selection [350], the call is made with the ARS feature. Feature Guide 77 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.1 Hands-free Operation Description A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons automatically activates hands-free mode. Conditions • • • PTs with the MONITOR Button PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations. Hands-free mode is cancelled if an extension user does not start dialling within 10 seconds. This feature can be used by pressing the following buttons when the indicator of the SP-PHONE/ MONITOR button is off: – SP-PHONE button – MONITOR button – INTERCOM button – CO button User Manual References 1.4.8 Talking to Another Party without Lifting the Handset (Hands-free Operation) 78 Feature Guide 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.2 Room Monitor Description An extension user can monitor a room or a door through another proprietary telephone (PT) or a doorphone without the destination party knowing. Conditions • • • • To monitor using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button or a single line telephone (SLT) with a MUTE button. To be monitored using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button. System programming determines the extensions that can be monitored using this feature ( Room Monitor [612]). A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts ( 1.15.1 Doorphone Call). If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party, it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]). Access tones will not be sent to a monitored PT. Paging tones will also not be received by a monitored PT. User Manual References 1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer Feature Guide 79 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.3 Microphone Mute Description During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone to consult privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker. When Microphone Mute is active, the user can hear the other party's voice, but the user's voice is muted. Conditions • This feature is only available on PTs that have an AUTO ANS/MUTE button. User Manual References 1.4.6 Muting a Microphone (Microphone Mute) 80 Feature Guide 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.4 Headset Operation Description This PBX supports headset-compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset by using an optional headset. For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset. This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection. Conditions • • • Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature ( 1.6.1.4 Redial). To set headset mode on a PT, use the handset/headset selector located on the telephone and/or on the headset. If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built- in speaker. User Manual References 1.4.7 Using the Headset (Headset Operation) Feature Guide 81 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.5 Data Line Security Description Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall, and Executive Busy Override. Extensions that have devices such as modems, fax machines, or Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) connected to them may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during communication. User Manual References 1.7.6 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security) 82 Feature Guide 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.6 Flash/Recall Description A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button to disconnect the current call and start another call without hanging up. For example, if this button is used to disconnect an outside (CO) line, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same outside (CO) line. Conditions • FLASH/RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected through system programming ( [110]): Flash/Recall Key Mode a) MODE 1: EFA mode ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)) An EFA signal is sent for the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]). b) MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode • • • A flash/recall signal is sent for the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed if the length of time that the button is pressed is longer than the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]). If the length of time that the button is pressed is shorter than the specified duration, an EFA signal will be sent for the specified duration. This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode". Disconnect Time The amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside (CO) line is programmable for each outside (CO) line ( Disconnect Time [422]). This feature generates an SMDR call record ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)) and restarts the call timer. The notation "F/" will be logged along with the new dial number. Feature Guide 83 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Description An extension user can access features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Call Waiting. An EFA (External Feature Access) signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This is only available on outside (CO) line calls, including Host PBX Access ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)). Conditions • • This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 1: EFA mode" ( 1.10.6 Flash/Recall). It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the EFA feature number when the current call is placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold). Flash/Recall Time The length of an EFA signal can be selected for each outside (CO) line ( Flash/Recall Time [418]). User Manual References 1.8.2 If a Host PBX is Connected 84 Feature Guide 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation Description Outside (CO) line calls are limited by the following features: Feature Description Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration When a call between an extension user and an outside party is established, the call duration is restricted by a timer ( Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]). Both parties will hear a warning tone at 5second intervals 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected. System programming determines which extensions have calls limited by this feature ( CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]). This timer applies to outside (CO) line calls that are made via the PBX. Outside-to-Outside (CO-toCO) Line Call Duration When a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration is restricted by a timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected. Conditions • • • Lockout If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, the call between both parties will be disconnected. A reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before the call is disconnected. No operation is necessary. When an extension user seizes an outside (CO) line and then transfers the call to another extension user who can use this feature, the Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration timer starts after the transferred call is answered by the outside party. The Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration feature applies to the following calls: – Calls forwarded by the FWD to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) – Calls transferred by the Call Transfer to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer) – Calls using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) – Calls using the Unattended Conference feature ( 1.13.1.2 Conference) Feature Guide 85 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone Description Any proprietary telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a single line device, such as a single line telephone (SLT), fax machine, or modem. When parallel mode is used, the 2 telephones function as follows: • Both share one extension number. • Either telephone or device can make or answer calls. Conditions • • • • • • System programming determines the SLTs that can be connected in parallel with a PT ( Parallelled Telephone [610]). When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator on the paired PT will function in the same way as when the PT is in operation. The following features cannot be used with an SLT connected in parallel with a PT: – Call Splitting – Conference – Door Open while connected to the doorphone – External Feature Access (EFA) – Hot Line An SLT connected in parallel with a PT will not ring if the PT is: – In Hands-free Answerback mode ( 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback). – In Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice) ( 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call). An extension user cannot make a call from the SLT if the PT is: – Playing background music (BGM) – Receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker – In programming mode Both the PT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls (if the ringer is turned on). Installation Manual References 2.5.2 Connecting Extensions in Parallel 86 Feature Guide 1.10 Conversation Features 1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection Description A CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an outside (CO) line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilisation of outside (CO) lines, the PBX monitors each line's status and when a CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone. Conditions • • • CPC Signal Detection is programmable for incoming outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]) and for outgoing outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal Detection— Outgoing [421]). If a CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the call will be disconnected. It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal from incoming outside (CO) line calls for the duration ( CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]) specified through system programming ( Incoming Reverse [153]). Feature Guide 87 1.11 Transferring Features 1.11 Transferring Features 1.11.1 Call Transfer Description An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or to an outside party. The following features are available: Feature Transferring method With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination party. Without Announcement Transfer is completed without an announcement. After dialling the destination extension number and hearing a ringback tone or busy tone, the originator can replace the handset. Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened. Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened. Conditions • • • • • • • 88 System programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer calls to an outside party ( Call Transfer to CO Line [606]). Single line telephone (SLT) users cannot transfer calls to an outside party. Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transfer destination extension does not answer within a preprogrammed time period ( Transfer Recall Time [201]), the call will return to the extension that transferred the call. If there is no answer for 30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts, the call will be disconnected. One-touch Transfer Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console users and proprietary telephone (PT) users can hold an outside (CO) line call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly ( One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]). A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can also be customised as a DSS button. Music, if available, is sent to the held outside party while the call is being transferred ( 1.12.4 Music on Hold). An internal audio source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). Outside (CO) Line Call Duration If an outside (CO) line call is transferred to an outside party, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). The extension that transferred the call will also hear a ring tone or an alarm tone 50 seconds before the timer expires ( 1.12.1 Call Hold). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected unless the extension joins the conversation again. If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected. Consultation Hold When a transferring party presses the TRANSFER button on a PT or the Recall/hookswitch on an SLT, the transferred party is automatically placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold). Feature Guide 1.11 Transferring Features Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer) Feature Guide 89 1.12 Holding Features 1.12 Holding Features 1.12.1 Call Hold Description An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Call Hold features are available: Feature Description General Call Hold Any extension can retrieve a held call. Exclusive Call Hold Only the proprietary telephone (PT) user who held the call can retrieve it. Pressing the HOLD button multiple times alternates between General and Exclusive Call Hold. Conditions • • • • • • 90 Using the Call Hold feature, a PT user can have one intercom call and multiple outside (CO) line calls on hold at the same time. To hold multiple intercom calls, the user should use the Call Park feature ( 1.12.2 Call Park). Using the Call Hold feature, a single line telephone (SLT) user can have either one intercom call or one outside (CO) line call on hold. To hold multiple calls, the user should use the Call Park feature. If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, the call is automatically disconnected. Music on Hold Music, if available, is sent to the outside party on hold ( 1.12.4 Music on Hold). An internal audio source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). Doorphone calls cannot be put on hold. Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring tone will be heard at the extension that put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call when the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard. If the hold recall time is set to "Disable", no tone will be heard. Going off-hook after the hold recall time has expired automatically re-establishes the conversation with the call on hold. SLT Hold Mode It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT, if the length of time that the Recall/ hookswitch is pressed is shorter than a specified duration ( Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]). The following methods ( SLT Hold Mode [104]) are available: Mode Hold Transfer to Extension Hold-1 Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Going on-hook Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Extension No. Feature Guide 1.12 Holding Features Mode Hold Transfer to Extension Hold-2 Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Call Hold Feature No. + Going on-hook Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Extension No. Hold-3 Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Call Hold Feature No. + Going on-hook Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Call Hold Feature No. + Extension No. In some cases, a call is not disconnected when an SLT user goes on-hook. Instead, the call is mistakenly placed on hold. After a specified time expires, the Hold Recall tone is heard. When the SLT user answers this, the user hears a cyclic tone (like a reorder tone). To avoid this problem, select "Hold2" or "Hold-3". In either of these modes, all calls are disconnected when going on-hook, unless the Call Hold feature number is entered after pressing the Recall/hookswitch. It is possible to set each SLT not to receive pulse signals through system programming ( Internal Pulse Detection [614]). This setting helps the PBX to avoid mistaking pulse signals sent by dialling "1" for hooking, in the countries/areas where the length of time that the Recall/hookswitch is pressed is set to "MODE 1: 50–180 ms" in Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]. Feature Guide References 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones User Manual References 1.4.2 Holding a Call Feature Guide 91 1.12 Holding Features 1.12.2 Call Park Description An extension user can hold a call by placing it into a common parking zone of the PBX. A parked call can be retrieved by any extension user. This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call with a proprietary telephone (PT), or more than one intercom call or outside (CO) line call with a single line telephone (SLT). Conditions • • • Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring tone will be heard at the extension that parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call when the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard. If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it is automatically disconnected. Retry If the specified parking zone is occupied, the extension user will hear a busy tone. While hearing a busy tone, the user can retry by selecting another parking zone. User Manual References 1.4.2 Holding a Call 92 Feature Guide 1.12 Holding Features 1.12.3 Call Splitting Description An extension user can speak alternately with 2 parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to speak with the other party. Conditions • • This feature does not apply to calls from doorphones or paging announcements. Consultation Hold When the extension user presses the HOLD button on a proprietary telephone (PT) or the Recall/ hookswitch on a single line telephone (SLT), the held party is automatically placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold). User Manual References 1.4.3 Talking to 2 Parties Alternately (Call Splitting) Feature Guide 93 1.12 Holding Features 1.12.4 Music on Hold Description An outside party on hold will hear audio to inform the party that the call is still on hold. The following types of audio are available depending on the user's country/area: a) Internal audio source b) External audio source c) Tone The audio sources (internal and external) can also be used for BGM ( 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)). Conditions • • • Hardware requirement: A user-supplied audio device, such as a CD player or radio for External audio source. The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). Operations such as Call Hold ( 1.12.1 Call Hold) and Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer) activate Music on Hold. Installation Manual References 2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals 94 Feature Guide 1.12 Holding Features 1.12.5 Consultation Hold Description When an extension user is on a call and performs Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer), Call Splitting ( 1.12.3 Call Splitting), or tries to establish a conference call ( 1.13.1.2 Conference), the call is automatically placed on consultation hold. When the operation is completed or cancelled, the consultation hold is released. Feature Guide 95 1.13 Conference Features 1.13 Conference Features 1.13.1 Conference Features 1.13.1.1 Conference Features—OVERVIEW Description The following features are available to establish a conference call: Feature 96 Description Details in Conference An extension user can establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call. • 1.13.1.2 Conference Executive Busy Override An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call. • 1.7.2 Executive Busy Override Feature Guide 1.13 Conference Features 1.13.1.2 Conference Description An extension user can establish a conference call. The following Conference features are available: Feature Description 3-party Conference During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to the conversation, thereby establishing a 3-party conference call. Unattended Conference: The proprietary telephone (PT) user who originated a conference with 2 outside parties can leave the conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference at any time, if he or she desires. 5-party Conference A PT user can establish a 3-party to 5-party conference call by entering the 5-party Conference feature number. Conditions [General] • • • Conference call arrangement The following configurations of 3-party or 5-party conference calls are possible at the same time through system programming ( Conference Pattern [116]): – 3-party conference calls between 3 extensions: Up to 3 – 3-party conference calls between one extension and 2 outside parties: Up to 4 – 3-party conference calls between 2 extensions and one outside party: Up to 4 – 5-party conference call with up to 5 extensions or with a combination of extensions and up to 2 outside parties: One Conference Button On a PT that does not have a CONF (Conference) button, a flexible CO button can be customised as a Conference button. Consultation Hold When an extension user tries to establish a conference call, the current call is automatically placed on consultation hold until the conference is established ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold). [3-party Conference] • • A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 2-party conference call is changed to a 3-party conference call. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]). Unattended Conference Recall The duration of unattended conferences is restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). A ring tone or an alarm tone is heard at the conference originator's extension 50 seconds before the timer expires. A warning tone starts to be heard by parties in the unattended conference 15 seconds before the timer expires. If the originator returns to the conference before the unattended conference call is disconnected, the timer will be cancelled. If not, the ring tone or alarm tone and the warning tone will continue to be heard until the unattended conference call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). Feature Guide 97 1.13 Conference Features • An unattended conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party through system programming ( Call Transfer to CO Line [606]). [5-party Conference] • • The following features will not function during a 5-party conference call: – Call Hold – Call Park – Call Splitting – Call Transfer – Executive Busy Override – Unattended Conference A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 5-party conference call is established and when a 5-party conference call is changed to a 4-party conference call or vice versa. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]). Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.4.5 Talking to Multiple Parties (Conference) 98 Feature Guide 1.14 Paging Features 1.14 Paging Features 1.14.1 Paging Description An extension user can make a paging announcement to several people at once. The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or an external pager (loudspeaker), depending on the type of Paging that is performed as follows: Type Paging method All Extensions The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs. External The page is heard through an external pager. Group The page is heard through the built-in speakers of the PTs that belong to a certain extension group ( Extension Group [600]). All Extensions & External The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs and an external pager simultaneously. The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone. It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call. Paging Deny It is possible for each extension to deny being paged. Conditions • • • • Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager. A confirmation tone will be sent to the external pager before the paging announcement. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( External Pager Access Tone [106]). Only one person can use this feature at a time. Extensions that cannot be paged are: – Ringing or busy PTs – PTs in Paging Deny mode – PTs in DND mode ( 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)) Installation Manual References 2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals User Manual References 1.6.1 Paging 1.6.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement Feature Guide 99 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15.1 Doorphone Call Description A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone. Doorphones can also be used for the Room Monitor feature ( 1.10.2 Room Monitor). Conditions • • • • • • • Hardware Requirement: An optional doorphone, and doorphone card. Doorphones 1 and 2 (or doorphones 3 and 4) cannot be used at the same time. When one is in use, the user cannot have a conversation with the other. A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts. If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party, it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]). Ring Duration If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone Ring Time [708]), ringing stops and the call is cancelled. An extension user can choose the preferred ring tone pattern for doorphone calls through system programming ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]). Call Destination System programming determines the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for each time service mode ( Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]). Door Open While on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in ( 1.15.2 Door Open). When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone (PT), a tone is heard instead of ringing. Installation Manual References 2.3.6 4-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82461) 2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers Feature Guide References 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones User Manual References 1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected 100 Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15.2 Door Open Description Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor. The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed through system programming to unlock the door for each time service mode ( Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]). While on a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock a door to let a visitor in ( 1.15.1 Doorphone Call). Conditions • • • Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door. A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed. Door Open Duration An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time ( Door Open Duration [709]). Installation Manual References 2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers User Manual References 1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected Feature Guide 101 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime Description Extension users can choose how their telephones receive doorphone calls, by selecting to hear ringing, a chime, or both, provided a doorbell/door chime connected to a door opener is connected to the PBX. They can recognise which doorphone is ringing by selecting a different doorphone chime pattern for each doorphone. [Programming Example] In order for an extension connected to extension jack 01 (extension 101) to be able to receive a doorphone call from a doorbell/door chime connected to Relay 4, programme as follows: Programming Doorphone 1 2 3 4 Doorphone Ringing*1 Enable (extn. 101) Enable (extn. 101) Enable (extn. 101) Enable (extn. 101) Doorphone Ring/Chime*2 Chime Chime Chime Chime Doorphone Chime Assignment*3 Relay 4 Relay 4 Relay 4 Relay 4 Doorphone Chime Pattern*4 Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 *1 *2 *3 *4 Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] Doorphone Chime Assignment [711] Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] In this example When a visitor presses the Call button of Doorphone 2: – A doorbell/door chime, connected to Relay 4, chimes with Pattern 2. – Because Doorphone Ring/Chime is set to "Chime", extension 101 does not ring. – The extension user who is allowed to receive a call from Doorphone 2 can answer the doorphone call by going off-hook within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone Ring Time [708]). If the user is allowed to unlock the door ( Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]), he or she can then unlock the door by entering the Door Open feature number. – If the called extension is busy and has set Call Waiting, the extension user hears a call waiting tone and the call information flashes on the display. Conditions • Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied doorbell/door chime connected to each door opener. Installation Manual References 2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers 2.7 Connecting Doorbell or Door Chime 102 Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features Feature Guide References 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones User Manual References 1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected Feature Guide 103 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM) Description A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle. Conditions • • • • Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external audio device, such as a CD player or radio for External audio source. The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook, receiving a call, or receiving a paging announcement. The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). This feature can be turned on and off by dialling "1" while the extension is on-hook and idle, if BGM is enabled through system programming ( BGM Control for APT [626]). Installation Manual References 2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals User Manual References 1.7.5 Turning on the Background Music (BGM) 104 Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD Description An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the following features: Feature Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Usage Details in When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear • 1.15.6 Direct a DISA OGM. Inward System Access (DISA) • 1.15.6 Direct 3-level Automated Attendant When the DISA AA service is active, the caller will (AA) hear a DISA OGM. The DISA AA service supports up Inward System to 3 levels of DISA OGMs. Access (DISA) Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) When a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions • 1.2.2 Uniform in the group are busy, the caller will hear a UCD OGM Call Distribution ( UCD Waiting Message [527]). (UCD) Conditions • • • • • • This feature functions differently from personal/common BV OGMs used by the BV feature ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)). To use this feature, "DISA" or "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]). The operator or manager can record a maximum of 32 messages (8 messages for DISA/UCD and 24 messages for 3-level AA). When an optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs is added, up to 2 messages can be played simultaneously for callers, and the total recording time of the PBX is increased from 3 to 6 minutes. After recording messages, the operator and manager can also play them back for confirmation. In addition, the operator and manager can erase messages for DISA/UCD. When the operator or manager tries to record or play back a message, he or she will hear an alarm tone if the message channel is in use. Prerecorded messages will not be cleared by a system restart. To clear them, use system programming ( Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]). Installation Manual References 2.3.7 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491) User Manual References 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 105 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Description Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows outside callers to be connected to their desired PBX destinations without the use of the operator. Callers can listen to a DISA outgoing message (OGM) instructing them as to which numbers to dial to be connected to the person or department they would like to speak with. DISA can also give PBX users access to PBX features, such as making outside (CO) line calls, when they are outside the office. This DISA OGM can guide callers and allow them to: • Call an extension by dialling the extension number. • Call another outside party via the outside (CO) lines of the PBX. • Access the desired extension simply by dialling a single-digit number (DISA Automated Attendant [AA] number) using DISA AA service. DISA OGM When a call arrives on a DISA line, callers will hear a DISA OGM or a short beep. When the DISA AA service is active, this DISA OGM will direct callers to dial the appropriate digit (DISA AA number) to be connected to a specified destination. To access other PBX features, such as making intercom or outside (CO) line calls, the caller may dial the appropriate numbers while the DISA OGM is playing. An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record a DISA OGM ( 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD). DISA AA Service DISA AA service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (DISA AA number) and be connected to the desired party automatically. The PBX can store up to 10 destinations that can be called by dialling a DISA AA number (0–9) for each DISA OGM ( DISA Built-in AA [501]). These destinations can be an extension number ( Extension Number [009]), an extension group number ( Extension Group [600]), or the DISA AA number of a 3-level DISA OGM ( 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]). After or while listening to the DISA OGM or a short beep, the caller may dial a DISA AA number as directed by the DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support."). Each DISA AA number directs the call to a preprogrammed location. Since DISA AA numbers are single digits, if the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA AA Wait Time [517]), DISA AA service will be bypassed because the PBX will assume the caller is trying to access a specific feature. When the DISA AA service is used, Incoming Dial Mode must be set to "With AA" through system programming ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). When "With AA" is selected, the PBX regards callerdialled digits "0" through "9" as DISA AA numbers. If no destination is assigned to "9" or "0", the PBX regards the number (9/0)* as the Automatic Line Access number ( Automatic Line Access [121]) or Operator Call number. Note * 106 For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9. Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features [Programming Example: 1-level (DISA) AA Table] In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith (extension 102) using 1-level (DISA) AA, programme as follows: Distribution method*1 Outside (CO) Line No. Day Lunch Night 1, 2 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM1 3–8 Normal Normal Normal DISA AA No. for 1-level AA*2 *1 *2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – Mike Smith (102) Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 Extn. 108 Extn. Group 1 – CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] DISA Built-in AA [501] [Programming Example: 3-level AA Table] In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith of the Software Support Team (extension 102) using 3level AA, programme as follows: Distribution method*1 Outside (CO) Line No. Day Lunch Night 1–4 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM2 DISA OGM3 5–8 Normal Normal Normal Feature Guide 107 1.15 Optional Device Features 1-level AA DISA AA No.*2 0 – 1 2 3 Extn. Extn. 2-level Group 1 Group 2 AA*3 4 5 6 7 8 9 – – – – – – 2-level AA DISA AA No.*4 0 – 1 2 3 Extn. 3-level Extn. Group 3 AA*5 Group 4 4 5 6 – – – 3-level AA DISA AA No.*4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Extn. 101 Mike Smith (102)*6 – – – – – CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] *1 DISA Built-in AA [501] *2 *3 2-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for AA number "3" in DISA Built-in AA [501] 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] *4 *5 3-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA number in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] 6 * Mike Smith (102): Select "Jack 02" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA number 1" in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] " In this example: 1) After or while listening to the AA first-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Service. Press 3 to speak to Support."), caller dials a DISA AA number, "3", as directed by the DISA OGM. 2) Next, the AA second-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Hardware Team. Press 2 to speak to Software Team.") directs the caller to dial another DISA AA number. The caller dials "2". 3) Last, the AA third-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Mike Smith. Press 0 to speak to the Operator.") directs the caller to dial a DISA AA number, "1", to be connected to a specified destination, extension 102. Note When the type of a destination from 2–level AA or 3–level AA to another setting is changed, any associated DISA OGM will also be cleared. In addition, any items within the AA menu being removed will also be removed. 108 Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features DISA Busy Mode If the destination of a DISA call is busy, the call will be redirected to an idle extension ( Hunting Group Set [100]) in the destination's idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). If no extension in the group is available, or if the destination of the DISA call is not a member of an idle extension hunting group, the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA Busy Mode [506]): a) Disconnect: The caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected. b) Call Waiting: The called extension hears a call waiting tone if the extension has set Call Waiting. c) DISA: The following procedure is performed: 1) If the assigned DISA OGM (busy message) has been recorded, the caller hears the DISA OGM (e.g., "The party you called is unavailable..."). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded, the caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected. 2) After the busy message has been played, the DISA OGM that was sent before the busy message is sent to the caller again. 3) The PBX waits for the caller to enter a new destination. In this case, the PBX does not accept any Outside Line Access number regardless of the security type. If the destination is a member of a DISA ring group, DISA Busy Mode will not function for the call. The PBX regards it as unanswered. DISA Intercept Mode If the destination of a DISA call does not answer the call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]), the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]): a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority: DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] This is useful for business calls. For example, the call can be forwarded to the operator, a Voice Processing System (VPS) or Built-in Voice Message (BV) automatically. DISA No Dial Mode If the PBX does not receive either DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals or a fax (CNG) tone within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or if the PBX does not receive DTMF signals within a preprogrammed time period ( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]), the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA No Dial Mode [510]): a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority: DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] DISA Security Mode Security can be enabled for the PBX to control the types of calls that can be made by callers using DISA. When the DISA security mode is set to "All Security" or "Trunk Security" ( DISA Security Mode [511]), a caller is required to enter a DISA security code ( DISA Security Code [512]) before making intercom and outside (CO) line calls, or outside (CO) line calls only, respectively. The DISA security code and the number of digits required for the DISA security code ( DISA Security Code Digits [530]) can be assigned by the manager. After entering a DISA security code, if the code is the same as one of the preprogrammed security codes, the caller will hear a short beep. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( DISA Tone after Security Code [518]). If the DISA security code is entered incorrectly 3 times when using DISA, a reorder tone will be sent to the caller and the call will be disconnected. Feature Guide 109 1.15 Optional Device Features Security Mode Intercom Calls Outside (CO) Line Calls All Security Trunk Security No Security Permitted Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Calls through DISA DISA callers can use DISA to make outside (CO) line calls when allowed by the DISA security mode. If a call between 2 outside parties is established via DISA, the length of the call can be limited to a preprogrammed duration ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). A timer will activate when the call is connected, and a warning tone will be heard 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). To detect the end of an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call, Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection can be assigned through system programming ( CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420], CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]). 110 Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features [Flowchart] A DISA call from an outside party is received. (DISA Delayed Answer Time expires) The PBX answers the call. (DISA OGM Mute Time expires) No Yes Is the assigned DISA OGM recorded? One short beep DISA OGM A (Intercept Time for Internal DISA expires) (DISA Wait Timer after OGM expires) Fax (CNG) tone Cyclic tone, CPC signal Nothing is dialled. A number is dialled. Yes Is a security code required? What is the security mode? Trunk or No No The security code is entered. One short beep All The call is disconnected. Busy tone Is Intercept Routing employed? No Yes The code is correct. Goes to C Make an outside (CO) line call. The call is disconnected. The code is incorrect. The call is established. Reorder tone The call reaches the destination. (DISA Ring Time before Intercept expires) The call is established. The call is sent to the fax extension. The call is disconnected. The call is not answered. The destination extension(s) is(are) busy. Is Intercept Routing employed? What is the DISA Busy Mode? The call is not answered for 40 seconds. B Yes The call is disconnected. No C Call Waiting Disconnect DISA Busy tone Is DISA IRNA to BV assigned? No Yes BV is answered. (DISA Ring Time before Intercept expires) The call is disconnected. The call is established. The call is sent to another extension. The call is not answered. A busy DISA OGM is heard. Goes to A Goes to B (DISA Ring Time after Intercept expires) The call is established. The call is not answered. The call is disconnected. Feature Guide 111 1.15 Optional Device Features Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call feature of DISA. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a) b) c) d) Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security). • • The maximum recording time of each message is 3 minutes. The preinstalled DISA/UCD OGM card can play only one message at a time and the maximum recording time is 3 minutes. When an optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs is added, up to 2 messages can be played simultaneously for callers, and the total recording time of the PBX is increased to 6 minutes. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]). DISA Delayed Answer Time It is possible to set the DISA Delayed Answer time ( DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]) so that the caller will hear a ringback tone for a preprogrammed length of time before hearing a DISA OGM or a short beep. Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party, the caller is not required to enter a DISA security code regardless of the security mode. DISA OGM Mute Time Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with DISA, the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time ( OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is connected. After the DISA OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the DISA OGM begins playing or a short beep is sent. SMDR The following are logged by SMDR for DISA calls ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)): – The destination of the DISA call – DISA security code status Call Deny System programming determines which extensions can receive DISA calls ( DISA Incoming Assignment [516]). If a DISA call is received at an extension that has Call Deny set, the caller will hear a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically. If a DISA call is received by a DISA ring group, this programme does not function for extensions in that DISA ring group and these extensions will still ring. Cyclic Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent ( Cyclic Tone Detection [513]). Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside-tooutside (CO-to-CO) line call via DISA. Fax Connection System programming determines the extensions that are able to receive fax data when the PBX receives a fax (CNG) tone via the DISA feature ( FAX Connection [503]). The preprogrammed extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set. • • • • • • • • 112 Maintaining the secrecy of passwords. Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed. Changing passwords regularly. Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features • • Fax Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times the fax (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent before the PBX recognises the incoming signal as fax data ( FAX Tone Detection [514]). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded or if the DISA OGM is short (0–5 s), in some cases the fax (CNG) tone may not be detected. In this case, it is recommended to set the length of time the PBX keeps detecting a fax (CNG) tone after completing a DISA OGM to "10 s" or "15 s" through system programming ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]). It is programmable whether a ringback tone ( Ringback Tone Pattern [128]) or Music on Hold ( Music on Hold [111]) is sent to the caller when a DISA call is received ( DISA Ringback Tone [531]). Installation Manual References 2.3.7 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491) Feature Guide References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) User Manual References 1.2.7 Accessing Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA]) 3.3.1 Programming Information Feature Guide 113 1.15 Optional Device Features 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) Description If an optional voice message card is installed in the PBX, a caller can leave a voice message in a user's personal message area or the PBX's common message area. Information on the recorded messages is automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, where it can be viewed later or used to play back the original message ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). The optional voice message card has 2 voice message resources (Built-in Voice Message [BV] resource 1 and BV resource 2), and every extension must belong to one of these resources based on system programming ( BV Resource [621]). Extension users other than the operator or manager can access the following options: – Personal BV outgoing messages (OGMs) – Personal voice messages (left by callers via Call Forwarding [FWD] or Direct Message) Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by that extension's user. The operator or manager can access the following options: – Personal BV OGMs for the operator or manager – Personal voice messages (left by callers via FWD or Direct Message for the operator or manager) – Common BV OGMs for the company – Common voice messages (left by callers for the company) Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by the operator or manager only. Up to 125 voice messages with a total recording time of 60 minutes can be logged per BV resource. All personal/common message areas within each BV resource share the total space of the resource. For example, in BV resource 1, if the common message area currently has 10 messages, totalling 10 minutes, the personal and common message areas can jointly store up to 115 messages or 50 minutes. [Example: Pattern A] BV Resource 1 BV Resource 2 Operator or Manager (Extn. 101) Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Common Message Area Personal Message Area Personal Message Area • Common BV OGM • Personal BV OGM • Personal BV OGM • Common Voice Message • Personal Voice Message • Personal Voice Message Personal Message Area Personal Message Area • Personal BV OGM • Personal BV OGM • Personal Voice Message • Personal Voice Message Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice Messages) 114 Extn. 124 Feature Guide Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages) 1.15 Optional Device Features [Example: Pattern B] BV Resource 1 BV Resource 2 Operator or Manager (Extn. 101) Extn. 102 Common Message Area Personal Message Area • Common BV OGM • Personal BV OGM • Common Voice Message • Personal Voice Message Extn. 124 Personal Message Area Personal Message Area • Personal BV OGM • Personal BV OGM • Personal Voice Message • Personal Voice Message Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice Messages) Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages) [Example: Pattern C] BV Resource 1 BV Resource 2 Manager (Extn. 101) Operator (Extn. 113) Personal Message Area Common Message Area • Personal BV OGM • Common BV OGM • Personal Voice Message • Common Voice Message Extn. 112 Personal Message Area Personal Message Area Extn. 124 Personal Message Area • Personal BV OGM • Personal BV OGM • Personal BV OGM • Personal Voice Message • Personal Voice Message • Personal Voice Message Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages) Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice Messages) If there are new voice messages in a user's personal message area or the common message area (if accessible), the user will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 4) when going off-hook. In addition, if that user's Feature Guide 115 1.15 Optional Device Features telephone has a MESSAGE button or Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light when a message has been left. A MESSAGE button can be used to listen to the message after the user goes off-hook. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button on a display proprietary telephone (PT) while on-hook shows voice message information. The BV feature allows users to also perform the following operations: • If outside (CO) line calls are preprogrammed to be automatically directed to a common message area ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), or if Direct Inward System Access (DISA) calls are preprogrammed to be redirected to a common message area via Intercept Routing ( DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]), the caller will hear a common BV OGM and can leave a voice message directly in the common message area. [Programming Example] Outside (CO) Line No. Distribution method*1 DISA IRNA to BV*2 Day Night Lunch 1 BV01*3 BV02*3 BV02*3 2 DISA OGM3 DISA OGM4 Normal BV20*3 BV21*3 Not Stored (Cont.) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 8 Normal Normal Normal *1 *2 Day Night Lunch Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] Note This feature functions only when "DISA" is selected as the distribution method for the corresponding outside (CO) line port. *3 BVxx (xx=01–24): Common BV OGM number followed by the Common BV OGM feature number "722" In this example: If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1: a) In day mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV01") for BV distribution is assigned. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area. b) In night/lunch mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV02") for BV distribution is assigned. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area. If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 2: a) In day mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM3") for DISA distribution and the common BV OGM to be played ("BV20") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area. 116 Feature Guide 1.15 Optional Device Features b) In night mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM4") for DISA distribution and the • • • common BV OGM to be played ("BV21") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area. An extension user can set incoming calls to be forwarded to his or her personal message area, when he or she cannot answer them. If an incoming call, direct to the user's extension, or a call using the DISA AA service ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), is forwarded to the user's personal message area, the caller will hear a personal BV OGM and can leave a voice message. Direct Message feature An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the personal message area of another extension, even if the extension has not been set to forward incoming calls to its personal message area, or even if no personal/common BV OGM has been recorded. When a caller leaves a voice message using this feature, the voice message is automatically linked to the Caller ID information recorded in the corresponding call log. An extension user can play and/or erase voice messages from the user's extension. In addition, the user can remotely play and/or erase voice messages through an outside (CO) line. The user accesses the relevant voice message area by entering a preprogrammed voice message access code ( BV Access Code through CO Line [625]) while hearing a personal/common BV OGM or DISA OGM. Note If the Voice Mail Integration feature has been set, the BV feature will not function. Conditions • • • • • • • • Hardware Requirement: An optional voice message card. The BV feature does not use OGMs for DISA/Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) on either the preinstalled DISA/UCD OGM card or the optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs (if present) ( 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD). When an extension that belongs to BV resource 1 or BV resource 2 is reassigned to the other resource, the voice messages that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased, but the personal/common BV OGMs are not erased. Each resource can only be accessed by one extension at a time. When the resource an extension is assigned to is being used by another extension, the extension cannot use that resource, even if the other resource is available. The PBX can record a maximum of 125 voice messages per resource. The maximum recording time of each voice message ( BV Recording Time [214]) and the total recording time of the PBX ( BV Total Recording Time [807]) are programmable. The maximum recording time of each personal/ common BV OGM ( Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]) is also programmable. System programming determines the extension users that can use this feature ( BV for Extension [622]). If a voice message channel (resource) is in use when an outside caller tries to leave a voice message, he or she will hear a ringback tone. The caller will hear a personal/common BV OGM as soon as a channel becomes available. Up to 8 outside (CO) line calls can be placed in a queue as they arrive. If a user performs System Data Clear by selecting "All para" through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]), all voice messages except for personal/common BV OGMs are erased. To erase all voice messages and personal/common BV OGMs at once, initialise the voice message card through system programming ( BV Card Initialisation [808]). When the voice message card is initialised, the PBX is reset. Feature Guide 117 1.15 Optional Device Features • • • • • • • Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication—Personal button or a Caller ID Indication—Common button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged. When the remaining recording time for the PBX is less than 5 minutes, the display informs both the extension users within the same resource and the manager that the voice message resource is full, and the users will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 5) when going off-hook. If the remaining recording time goes back to being 5 minutes or more, for example, when messages are erased, the display returns to the idle status display and the users will hear a normal dial tone (dial tone 1) instead of dial tone 5 when going off-hook. If the FWD feature is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is the BV feature number ( Call Forwarding Selection [963]), outside (CO) line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will not ring, even if the user has set the FWD feature. If FWD is disabled, outside (CO) line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will ring. Only the operator or the manager can access the common message area (including common BV OGM). The operator has higher priority than the manager as follows: – When the operator extension is reassigned, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. The new operator can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM. – When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is newly assigned, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the manager) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. The operator can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM. – When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is deleted, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. In this case, the manager can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM. A voice message area cannot be included as a member of a conference call. Even if a caller does not leave a voice message in either the personal or common message area, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV OGM, the information is still logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (common or personal area) and displayed by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with BV, the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time ( OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is connected. After the Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the personal/common BV OGM begins playing. Installation Manual References 2.3.8 2-Channel Voice Message Card (KX-TE82492) Feature Guide References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones User Manual References 1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV]) 2.1.6 Recording, Playing, or Erasing Common BV Outgoing Messages 118 Feature Guide 1.16 Caller ID Features 1.16 Caller ID Features 1.16.1 Caller ID Description The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs) as well as some single line telephones (SLTs) when receiving calls. Additionally, Caller ID information is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension that received the call, allowing the caller to view a record of incoming calls or make a call to a person in the call log later. The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller's telephone number when it is received by, for example, adding an Outside (CO) Line Access number or adding/deleting certain digits of incoming telephone numbers automatically. This allows an extension user to make a call later to a telephone number logged in his or her call log without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc. Notes • • • The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Guide refers to features that can receive caller information sent from the telephone company and received on outside (CO) lines. Your network provider may use a different name for this type of service. To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller ID [900]). Caller ID signalling type, FSK (Bell 202 or V.23) or DTMF, can be selected to match the type used by your telephone company through system programming ( Caller ID Type [910]). Caller ID Display on SLT This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with either FSK-type Caller ID or DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency)-type Caller ID. Notes • • This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)-type FSK and Bellcore-type FSK. This feature does not comply with methods using DT-AS signal or line reversal signal. 1. Caller ID-Related Feature Feature Incoming Call Log Description Details in Caller ID information is automatically recorded in • 1.16.2 Incoming the call log of the extension that received the call. Call Log This information can be used to view a record of incoming calls or make calls to any number in the call log. 2. Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX can add "0"*1 to the caller's telephone number as a leading number if it does not begin with "0", through system programming ( Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]). *1 For New Zealand, "0" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length of a telephone number is 8 or 9 digits, and "00" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length is 10 digits or more. Feature Guide 119 1.16 Caller ID Features 3. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification When Caller ID information is checked, the PBX can automatically modify the caller's telephone number according to a preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number allows the extension user to make a call to this number later without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc. [Programming Example: Caller ID Modification Table] Call Type Local Call*2 Code No. Area Code*1 Removed No. of Digits Added No. 1 212 3 Not Stored 2 011 3 001 : : : : [Not programmable] 0 1 5 Long-distance Call*3 *1 *2 *3 120 Feature Guide Caller ID Area Code [901] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902] Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903] 1.16 Caller ID Features <Modification Flowchart> An outside (CO) line call containing Caller ID information is received. Yes No Is the caller's area code stored in the Caller ID Modification Table? Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the corresponding "Local Call" field. Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the "Long-distance Call" field. Example: Removed number of digits: 3 Added number: blank Example: Removed number of digits: 0 Added number: 1 Example: Received number: 201 555 1234 Example: Received number: 313 555 1234 Modified number: Modified number: 555 1234 Modification is complete. Modified number is logged. 1 313 555 1234 Modification is complete. Modified number is logged. 4. Displaying the Caller's Name When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller's name in the following order, then show that name on the display. 1) The System Speed Dialling Table 2) The Caller ID information received from the telephone company If a caller's name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed. Conditions [General] • Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card. [Caller ID Display on SLT] • Caller ID Display on SLT feature applies to: Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls. Intercom calls include forwarded calls, calls from Transfer Recall and Hold Recall. Outside (CO) line calls include calls directed to Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) or Direct Inward System Feature Guide 121 1.16 Caller ID Features • • • • • • • • • • Access (DISA) ring groups, forwarded calls, intercepted calls, or calls from extensions that placed outside (CO) line calls on consultation hold. SLT Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]). Each SLT (including an SLT connected in parallel with a PT) can be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]). When the caller's telephone number is sent to an SLT, an Outside (CO) Line Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]), to be used when calling the caller back. If a call is transferred, forwarded, or intercepted via Intercept Routing to an SLT, the original caller's information will be shown on the SLT. During a conversation, Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT. When FSK-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 20 digits), name (max. 16 characters), date and time, or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information such as "Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number exceeds 20 digits, the SLT receives only the first 20 digits. If the caller's name exceeds 16 characters, the SLT receives only the first 16 characters. When DTMF-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits) or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits. However, when a value less than "1500 ms" is set through system programming ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), the SLT receives only the first 10 digits. Depending on the type of SLT being used, caller names and the dates and times that calls were received may not be able to be shown on the SLT. If an outside caller disconnects a call to an SLT on which the call's Caller ID information is displayed, and the SLT receives another outside (CO) line call directly after, the SLT will wait until a preprogrammed time has passed ( SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]) before it starts to ring, and the new caller's Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. A received call can be answered even if it is not yet ringing, but Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT. A certain amount of time may be required between calls for an SLT to receive Caller ID information correctly. To enable the Caller ID feature, it may be necessary to set the same ring tone pattern ( SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]) as used by the telephone company. Installation Manual References 2.3.5 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493) Feature Guide References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones 122 Feature Guide 1.16 Caller ID Features 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Description When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller's identity. This information is also automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed later or used to call that caller back. There are 2 types of call log areas available in the PBX. One is the personal area, which stores logs of calls received by each extension when a call arrives at a certain proprietary telephone (PT). The other is the common area, which stores a log of calls arriving at multiple PTs or via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Intercept Routing feature. Caller ID information can be logged by the following methods: • Logged automatically when no one answers calls. • Logged automatically if an extension user presets logging of the caller's information when answering calls. • Logged manually by pressing the Caller ID Indication button during a conversation. • Logged automatically when a caller leaves a voice message ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)) [Example] If the information is stored in record "002", 002: 0011223344 --- Caller's number 002:JOHN WHITE --- Caller's name 002: May15 10:23A --- Date and time of call New:002 Old:001 --- Status* & number of logged calls Caller ID Selection buttons Caller ID Indication buttons Personal Personal Common Common * "New" is displayed for call records that have not previously been viewed; "Old" is displayed for call records that have previously been viewed. Both new and old call records are stored in each personal and common area. Conditions • Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button, and will indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension, as shown below. Light pattern Status of the corresponding call log Red on There are new call records since the last time the call log was viewed. Off There are no new call records in the call log, or the call log has been already viewed. Feature Guide 123 1.16 Caller ID Features • • • • • • • 124 The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button will alert an extension user to any missed (unanswered) calls. The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button is also used to store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and to view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller. If a Caller ID Indication—Common button is not assigned to any PT, the calls will be logged in the personal area of the PT that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack, and its Caller ID Indication— Personal button light will turn red. Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button. The Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button is used to display the number of logged calls while on-hook, to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, and to inform an extension user that the personal or common area call log is full. The user may also change the displayed information by pressing the "#" key instead of the Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information. It is programmable whether the user can view call logs stored in the common area or not ( Common Area Call Log Check [909]). If this programme is enabled, the Caller ID Indication—Common button and Caller ID Selection—Common button can be assigned. Incoming Call Log Memory The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited ( 4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources). When a call log is full (personal area: 20 calls, common area: 300 calls), the Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button light will turn red. When a caller leaves a voice message, it is automatically linked to the Caller ID information in the Incoming Call Log. Up to 125 voice messages per BV resource are stored separately from the Incoming Call Logs mentioned above. It is possible for an extension user (or the operator/manager) to select whether the oldest call in the personal area (or common area) will be replaced each time a call is received, or whether the new call information will be discarded, by entering the 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area (or 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area) feature number. Caller records for all call logs of an extension are numbered sequentially as they are received, regardless of which call log the information is stored in. For example, information on the first call received will be stored as record "001" (e.g., 001, logged in the personal area) and information on the second call received will be stored as record "002" (e.g., 002, logged in the common area), whether it is logged in the personal area, common area, or BV. If the call log in the personal area becomes full when the 21st call (e.g., 110, logged in the personal area) has been set to overwrite the oldest call (001, logged in the personal area), – The oldest call will be deleted and subsequent records will be moved one number down, if the 21st call is unanswered or if it is answered but has different information from the 20th call. – The 21st call will be discarded and the previous call information will stay as it is, if the 21st call is answered and has the same information as the 20th call. Common area call logs function in the same way. If a transferred call (unscreened) is not answered, the information is logged in the personal area of the final destination. Regardless of the telephone type being used, the recorded voice message is associated with the caller's information. Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication—Personal button or a Caller ID Indication—Common button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged. Incoming Call Log Display Lock An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log (including associated voice messages) stored in his or her personal area, preventing other users from viewing its contents ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock). The operator or manager can cancel the lock in the case that the extension user forgets the lock code. Feature Guide 1.16 Caller ID Features • • • • • • • The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator and manager. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers will be displayed when Caller ID information is checked. Extension users can also modify the incoming telephone numbers manually. Initial Display Selection If the Caller ID service provides both the number and name, the user can select which is shown first on the display of the PT through system programming ( Caller ID Log Priority [904]). While a user is viewing his or her extension's Incoming Call Log, if the caller whose information is being viewed also left a voice message, the Message/Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light will turn on. The associated voice messages in that personal/common message area can be played or erased with the MESSAGE button or the TRANSFER button respectively. Even if there are message waiting indications left at a user's extension, the Message/Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light that displays notifications from the Message Waiting feature ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting) turns off while the user is viewing his or her extension's Incoming Call Log with the Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button. If a user erases voice messages by any method (for example, by using BV or performing System Data Clear), the caller's information is erased from the extension's Incoming Call Log simultaneously. Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (common or personal area). During a conversation with an extension or outside party, an extension user can transfer the call to another extension that has set incoming calls to be forwarded to that extension's personal message area, or can transfer the call to the personal message area using the Direct Message feature of BV. If the transferring user performs Call Transfer with Announcement, there is a chance that both parties may be recorded in the same message. In this case, the information of the last extension or outside party that recorded the message is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (personal area). Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Caller ID 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.9.1 Calling with the Incoming Call Log 2.1.4 Erasing All Caller Information in the Common Area (Incoming Call Log in the Common Area—CLEAR ALL) 2.1.5 Disregarding the Newest Call or Overwriting the Oldest Call in the Common Area Call Log (301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area) Feature Guide 125 1.17 Message Features 1.17 Message Features 1.17.1 Message Waiting Description When an extension user calls another extension user who does not answer the call, he or she can leave a message waiting indication. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user's telephone will light, indicating that a call was missed, or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature is waiting. A MESSAGE button can be used to call the caller back or listen to the message. When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the MESSAGE button on it lights, or the Message/ Ringer Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on-hook shows the caller's information as shown below: [Example] 105:Tom Smith --- Extension no. and name of the person who left the message Message/Message for another extension buttons This extension Other extension* * This button is useful when, for example, the manager checks messages left for another extension. Conditions • • • • • • 126 System programming determines the single line telephones (SLTs) that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]). If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number. Message for another extension Button A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can be customised as a Message for another extension button. This button can be used on a PT that is allowed through system programming ( Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]) to access messages left for another extension. Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock An extension user can lock or unlock message waiting indications to prevent others from viewing, calling back or clearing message waiting indications left at his or her extension. The operator and manager can override this lock to unlock it (Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL). Even while this lock is on, the user can view, call back, or clear message waiting indications left at his or her own extension. Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left. Message waiting indications are always left on the originally called extension. Message waiting indications cannot be sent to an FWD destination ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) or an idle extension hunting destination ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). Feature Guide 1.17 Message Features • • • • A message waiting indication is automatically cleared when the called extension calls the caller back and the call is answered. Message Waiting Indication via Voice Mail APT Integration If a voice message is left for the called extension, it can be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after pressing the lit MESSAGE button ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). Message Waiting Indication via BV If a voice message is left in the user's personal message area or the common message area, it can be played back with the lit MESSAGE button by the user or the operator/manager respectively ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)). It is possible to activate the Message/Ringer Lamp ( KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]) on the KX-T7700 series telephones for the following incoming calls: – Incoming call from an outside (CO) line with Caller ID information – Incoming call from another extension to a busy extension when the called extension has set Call Waiting (Call Waiting Tone 1) – Incoming call from a doorphone when an optional doorphone or doorbell/door chime is connected to the PBX Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV]) 1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 127 1.17 Message Features 1.17.2 Absent Message Description Extension users can prepare a brief text message (Absent Message) that will be displayed to other extension users when they are called. This message can explain the reason for their absence, and can be used by any extension user. The following Absent Messages may be programmed: Message No. Message 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext %%% (Extension Number) 4 Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute) AM (or PM) 5 Out Until %%/%% (Month/Day) 6 In a Meeting Note The "%" shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension. Conditions • • An extension user can select only one Absent Message at a time. The selected message is displayed at the extension every time the user goes off-hook. The caller must be using a display proprietary telephone (PT) to see the Absent Message. User Manual References 1.5.2 Showing a Message on the Caller's Telephone Display (Absent Message) 128 Feature Guide 1.17 Message Features 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS Description When outside (CO) line calls are received from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre, the PBX can route incoming calls to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS according to a preprogrammed set of rules (SMS Routing Table). Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access. If a user subscribes to his or her telephone company's Caller ID service and the PBX receives an SMS centre call from the registered SMS centre number, the PBX will relay the text message to the SLT. In all other cases, incoming outside (CO) line calls will be directed according to system programming ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]). To make or receive SMS centre calls using fixed lines, the PBX and specific SLTs must be programmed so they will know how to handle those calls. To programme SLTs, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the SLTs. [Programming Example: SMS Routing Table with Sub-address Numbers] When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1/2 and "3847002" for CO 3, programme as follows: 1) PBX setting SMS Centre Number for Receiving*1: 1112224444 Location No. *1 *2 *3 Outside (CO) Line No.*2 Extension Jack No.*3 1 CO 1, CO 2 Jack 01, Jack 02, Jack 03 2 CO 3 Jack 10, Jack 11 (Cont.) : : : : : : 8 Not Stored Not Stored SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145] SMS Routing Table—CO [146] SMS Routing Table—Extension [147] If the SMS centre supports sub-address numbers, up to 8 SLTs can be assigned as the SMS destination for each location. One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number. Feature Guide 129 1.17 Message Features 2) SLT setting Extension Jack No. * SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for Sending Receiving SMS Subaddress Jack 01 89* 1112223333 1112224444 1 Jack 02 89* 1112223333 1112224444 2 Jack 10 89* 1112223333 1112224444 1 (Cont.) : : : : : : : : 89: Outside (CO) Line Access number used to make SMS centre calls using the fixed outside (CO) lines. When the SMS centre can receive an SMS message from any telephone number, the Automatic Line Access number or Outside (CO) Line Access number can also be used respectively. In this example: a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "38470011" as the destination. b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "38470012" as the destination. c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 10, enter "38470021" as the destination. [Programming Example: SMS Routing Table without Sub-address Numbers] When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1, "3847002" for CO 2, and "3847003" for CO 8, programme as follows: 1) PBX setting SMS Centre Number for Receiving: 1112224444 Location No. Outside (CO) Line No. Extension Jack No. 1 CO 1 Jack 01 2 CO 2 Jack 02 (Cont.) : : : : : : 8 CO 8 Jack 08 If the SMS centre does not support sub-address numbers, only one SLT can be assigned for each location. One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number. 130 Feature Guide 1.17 Message Features 2) SLT setting Extension Jack No. SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for Sending Receiving SMS Subaddress Jack 01 89 1112223333 1112224444 – Jack 02 89 1112223333 1112224444 – Jack 08 89 1112223333 1112224444 – (Cont.) : : : : : : : : In this example: a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "3847001" as the destination. b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "3847002" as the destination. c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 08, enter "3847003" as the destination. Conditions • • • • • • • • • • Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card. The PBX relays text messages from the SMS centre to SMS-enabled SLTs, and vice versa. To receive SMS information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller ID [900]). Each SMS-enabled SLT must be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]). If an SLT user sets the Automatic Callback Busy feature by dialling "6" because the selected line is busy when he or she tries to send a text message, the SLT will ring when the line becomes idle. To send the text message, the user must answer the callback ring, go on-hook, and then make an SMS centre call again. When a call is received on one of the outside (CO) lines preprogrammed in an SMS Routing Table, the destination SLT may ring one time. If a user wants to receive SMS messages on an SLT, it is recommended to not connect a proprietary telephone (PT) in parallel. If the PT user answers the call, the SMS message will not be received. When an SMS centre call is received at an SLT that has set the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature, the FWD feature will not function and the SMS message is received by that SLT. When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call, in some cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), because it takes very little time to send SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of call duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]). When a user on an SLT that is in "TONE (DTMF)" mode makes an SMS call using outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode through system programming ( Dial Mode [401]), if the SMS centre number is longer than supported, for example 16 digits, the SMS call may not be completed. In this case, set the dialling mode of the SLT to "PULSE" mode using the switch. Feature Guide 131 1.17 Message Features Installation Manual References 2.3.5 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493) 132 Feature Guide 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons Description Proprietary telephones (PTs) and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles feature a wide variety of feature buttons and Line Access buttons, explained below. Note that certain models do not have certain buttons. For a description of the buttons found on each PT or DSS Console, please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PT or DSS Console. [PT] Button Function Navigator Key, Volume Key Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset, and the display contrast, or to select desired items. PROGRAM Used to enter and exit programming mode. FLASH/RECALL Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up (Flash/Recall mode), or to send an EFA (External Feature Access) signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access external features (EFA mode). HOLD Used to place a call on hold. SP-PHONE (Speakerphone) Used to select handset or hands-free operation. MONITOR Used to select hands-free dialling and monitor operation. MESSAGE Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left a message waiting indication, or play back voice messages. This button is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode), except for on KX-T7700 series telephones. With KX-T7700 series telephones, the Message/Ringer Lamp is lit when a message waiting indication is left at an extension. REDIAL Used to redial the last number dialled. TRANSFER Used to transfer a call to another party. Flexible CO Used to access an outside (CO) line (or outside (CO) line group) when making or receiving a call. The button's preprogrammed Outside (CO) Line Access method determines which line is selected (Default: Single-CO [S-CO]). Can also be customised as a feature button. INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls. AUTO ANS (Auto Answer)/MUTE Used to answer an intercom call automatically in hands-free mode, or to mute the built-in microphone during a conversation. VOICE CALL Used to answer an intercom call automatically. AUTO DIAL/STORE Used for System Speed Dialling/Saved Number Redial, playing back personal/ common BV outgoing messages (OGMs) used by the Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature, and storing programme changes. Feature Guide 133 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features Button Function CONF (Conference) Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call. FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension. PAUSE Used to insert a dialling pause in a stored number. PF (Programmable Feature) Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button. [DSS Console] Button Usage Flexible DSS Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be customised as different feature buttons. PF Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button. Conditions • Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature. User Manual References 1.1.1 Before Operating a Telephone 134 Feature Guide 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are buttons whose functions can be customised through either system or personal programming. The following types of flexible buttons are found on proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles: a) b) c) d) Flexible CO buttons Flexible DSS buttons Programmable Feature (PF) buttons Flexible MESSAGE button [Button Usage] Button Function Single-CO (S-CO) Used to access a specified outside (CO) line for making or receiving calls ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access). Group-CO (G-CO) Used to access an idle outside (CO) line in a specified outside (CO) line group for making calls. Incoming calls from outside (CO) lines in the assigned outside (CO) line group arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access). Other-CO (O-CO) Used to access an idle outside (CO) line for making calls. Incoming calls from the assigned outside (CO) lines, which are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons, arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access). Direct Station Selection (DSS) Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation ( One-touch Dialling Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a one-touch operation ( 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling). Message Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left the message waiting indication, or play back voice messages ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). Message for another extension Used to access voice messages stored for another extension ( Message Waiting). FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension ( 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW). Save Used to store a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later ( 1.6.1.4 Redial). Conference Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call ( Caller ID Indication— Personal Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in his or her personal area, store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call). 1.17.1 1.13.1.2 Conference). Feature Guide 135 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features Button Function Caller ID Selection— Personal Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the personal area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). Caller ID Indication— Common Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in the common area, store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). Caller ID Selection— Common Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the common area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). Log-in/Log-out Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status ( Day Used to change the time service mode to day mode ( Night Used to change the time service mode to night mode ( 2.2.3 Time Service). Lunch Used to change the time service mode to lunch mode ( 2.2.3 Time Service). Extension Lock Used to remotely lock or unlock another extension ( Features). 2-way Record Used to record a conversation into the user's own mailbox ( APT Integration). 2-way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). Live Call Screening (LCS) Used to listen while a caller is leaving a message in the user's voice mailbox and, if desired, intercept the call ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). LCS Cancel Used to stop monitoring the user's own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a message, or stop the alert tone heard in private mode while a caller is leaving a message ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension ( Mail APT Integration). 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). 2.2.3 Time Service). 2.2.4 Operator/Manager 1.19.1 Voice Mail 1.19.1 Voice Conditions • • Extension button confirmation A display PT user can confirm the button settings, such as the flexible CO button, by pressing the corresponding button while on-hook. The Day, Night, Lunch, and Extension Lock buttons can only be assigned to flexible DSS buttons at an extension assigned as the operator or manager. User Manual References 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons 136 Feature Guide 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.18.3 LED Indication Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns. Line Status Buttons: Single-CO (S-CO), Group-CO (G-CO), Other-CO (O-CO), INTERCOM Corresponding Extension Status Button: Direct Station Selection (DSS) 1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp • • • Incoming call from an outside (CO) line/another extension: Red flashing Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on No messages present and no incoming call: Off 2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons Line Status Button Light Pattern S-CO G-CO This extension is holding the line. This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Call Hold or using the line for an unattended conference. – – – Another extension is holding the line. – Incoming call Incoming call – Line(s) in use Red on Rapid red flashing INTERCOM This extension is using the line. Moderate– speed green flashing Slow red flashing O-CO Idle Off Green on Slow green flashing Rapid green flashing Intercom Line Status Outside (CO) Line Status – – – Feature Guide 137 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS Light Pattern Off Idle Slow red flashing Call Forwarding (FWD)* Moderate-speed red flashing Do Not Disturb (DND)* Red on Busy * This setting can be changed through system programming ( DSS Lamp Mode [112]). 4. Flashing Light Patterns 1s Slow Flashing Moderate Flashing Rapid Flashing Conditions • Incoming outside (CO) line calls arrive on available buttons in the following priority: S-CO G-CO O-CO Feature Guide References 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.12.1 Call Hold 1.13.1.2 Conference 138 Feature Guide 1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.18.4 Display Information Description A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving calls: Display Item Display Example Condition The extension number and name of the calling or called extension 123: Tom Smith – The status of the called extension 123: Busy – The name and number of the doorphone Door Phone 1 – The telephone number dialled 1234567890 – 102:Mike – The extension number and name of the calling extension after the call is forwarded The received call information a) Caller's name ABC Company b) Caller's number 12345678 c) Outside (CO) line number Call on CO 1 Duration of the current outside (CO) line CO 1 0:01'15 call The first line message can be either (a) or (b) at each extension through system programming ( Caller ID Log Priority [904]). – Conditions • • • • Display Contrast The display contrast can be adjusted with the Navigator key or the CONTRAST selector. This is available only for PTs. Ringer Volume The volume of the ringer can be adjusted with the RINGER Volume selector. Self-extension Number A display PT user can confirm his or her own jack number and extension number on the display. Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the maximum length of the display are not displayed. Although in this case information may not be displayed properly, the received information is not altered. When the information displayed by pressing specific buttons (One-touch Dialling, REDIAL, Save) while on-hook exceeds 17 characters, the "&" mark will be shown on the right side of the display. User Manual References 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 139 1.19 Voice Mail Features 1.19 Voice Mail Features 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration Description A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) that supports APT Integration can provide many features and conveniences that are unachievable using traditional voice mail systems that rely on Inband (DTMF) Integration. Many of these features are explained below. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the Panasonic VPS. 1. Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup (or DIP switch initialisation without a PC) The PBX shares information with the VPS during setup that allows the VPS to automatically create the appropriate mailboxes for all extension numbers. The following settings to enable APT Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS. When 2 VPSs are connected to the PBX, note that each extension can have only one mailbox, but when the VPSs have executed Automatic Configuration, an extension has a mailbox in both VPSs. Therefore, an extension user must delete a mailbox in either VPS so that there are no duplicates. Extension group 7 VPS 7 Port 1 8 Port 2 PBX VPS 15 Port 1 16 Port 2 Extension group 8 This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP50 series VPS, which can be connected with 4-conductor wire to 4 extension jacks of the PBX. [Programming Example: Voice Mail Table] *1 *2 APT Integration VM 1 APT Port*1 VM 2 APT Port*2 Enable Port 7 & 8 Port 15 & 16 VM 1 APT Port [130] VM 2 APT Port [131] In this example: When "Port 7 & 8" is selected for VPS1, extension jacks 07 and 08 are placed in extension group 7 automatically. Likewise, when "Port 15 & 16" is selected for VPS2, extension jacks 15 and 16 are placed in extension group 8 automatically. Each extension group can be connected to only one VPS. Also the 140 Feature Guide 1.19 Voice Mail Features idle extension hunting type is set as Circular Hunting, and the Voice Mail (VM) Hunting Chain and Automated Attendant (AA) Hunting Chain are automatically enabled in each of these 2 extension groups. 2. AA Service Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages. 3. VM Service Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience. AA Service A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). 1. AA to Extension AA receives and answers outside (CO) line calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling from the calling party. Outside (CO) Line Call DIL PBX VPS Extension Transfer Busy/No Answer (Record message) AA 1 AA 2 AA Hunting Chain Feature Guide 141 1.19 Voice Mail Features 2. Extension Backup If the VPS is assigned to ring with other extensions, for example the operator, for the same outside (CO) line, the VPS can be used as a backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming outside (CO) line call. In order to use this feature, Delayed Ringing must be set for the VPS ( Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/ Lunch [411-413]). Outside (CO) Line Call Normal PBX Extension (e.g., Operator) Immediately VPS AA 1 10 s delay AA 2 15 s delay 3. Status Notification to the VPS When a call is redirected to the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the called extension to the VPS. This allows the VPS to appropriately handle the call, playing the appropriate OGM for the caller. For example, if the called extension is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the OGM (e.g., "I am unable to answer your call right now, but I will get back to you shortly.") can be played. VM Service 1. Accessing a Mailbox The PBX sends special messages to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Followon ID). 2. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can set his or her calls to be forwarded to the VPS ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)). When a call is received at the extension, the PBX sends the extension's mailbox number to the VPS, and the VPS answers the call with the appropriate OGM (e.g., "Hi, I'm out of the office today..."). Outside (CO) Line Call DIL, DISA PBX Intercom Call (by Extension, Operator, etc.) VPS Extension 142 Feature Guide FWD Port 1 Port 2 VM Hunting Chain 1.19 Voice Mail Features 3. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS Outside (CO) line calls via DISA ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) can be programmed to be automatically redirected to an extension user's mailbox when the extension user does not or cannot answer them ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing). The VPS can answer the call with an OGM (e.g., "I can't take your call now...") and callers can leave messages in the mailbox. In order to use this feature, a voice mail extension number must be assigned as the intercept destination for the original destination extension that received the call ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416], Flexible Ringing— Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]), and "Intercept" must be selected through system programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]). Outside (CO) Line Call DISA PBX VPS Extension Intercept Immediately 5 s delay Port 1 Port 2 4. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS Extension users can transfer calls to a mailbox, after which callers can leave a message for the desired party. While answering a call, the extension user simply presses the VM Transfer button and enters the extension number of the party the caller wishes to leave a message for. The VPS will answer the transferred call and record a message into the appropriate mailbox. VM Transfer Button In order to use this feature, the extension user must use a flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button customised as a VM Transfer button. A voice mail extension number must be assigned to the button when creating it. 5. Listening to Recorded Messages After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access; he or she does not need to enter a mailbox number. A single line telephone (SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number. 6. Live Call Screening (LCS) Similar to a conventional home answering machine, LCS allows a PT user to monitor his or her own mailbox as a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call simply by pressing the LCS button. PT users can choose one of 2 ways to perform LCS, through personal programming (Live Call Screening [LCS] Mode Set): Hands-free mode: The user can screen calls automatically through the built-in speaker. Private mode: The user will hear an alert tone when a message is being recorded in his or her mailbox. To screen calls, the user must press the MONITOR, SP-PHONE, or LCS button. Feature Guide 143 1.19 Voice Mail Features LCS/LCS Cancel Button A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as an LCS or LCS Cancel button. 7. 2-way Recording into the VPS PT users can record their own telephone conversations. These recordings can be stored in the PT user's own mailbox (2-way Record) or in another user's mailbox (2-way Transfer), depending on which button the user presses to begin recording. 2-way Record/2-way Transfer Button A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as a 2-way Record or 2-way Transfer button. Note You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded before beginning to record any telephone conversation. Conditions [General] • A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features: – FWD—All Calls – FWD—Busy/No Answer – DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is forwarded to the VPS by the IRNA feature from a DISA ring group, the PBX will send the VPS the mailbox number of the extension within the DISA ring group that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack. [Live Call Screening (LCS)] • • • To prevent the unauthorised screening of calls, a 3-digit password must be entered when activating LCS for an extension. If the user forgets his or her password, it can be cleared by the operator or manager (LCS Password Control). If an extension user is screening a call and then goes off-hook to answer it, the VPS will either stop or continue recording the message, according to system programming ( LCS Recording Mode Set [620]). If a call arrives while an extension user is having a conversation with another party and the extension has Call Waiting activated, the user will hear a call waiting tone. The user can put the existing call on hold before accessing LCS. [2-way Recording into the VPS] • If all ports of the VPS are busy when a user tries to record a conversation: – The user hears an alarm tone when pressing the 2-way Record button. – The user hears an alarm tone after pressing the 2-way Transfer button followed by an extension number. Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons 144 Feature Guide 1.19 Voice Mail Features User Manual References 1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 145 1.19 Voice Mail Features 1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration Description A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) or similar product from another manufacturer can provide Automated Attendant (AA) and Voice Mail (VM) services when connected to the PBX. The VPS and PBX communicate with each other by sending DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the VPS. 1. AA Service Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages. 2. VM Service Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience. AA Service A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). If the VPS transfers a call via the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called party using a DTMF status signal so that the VPS will know the status. This enables the VPS to quickly play an appropriate OGM to the caller (e.g., "I'm handling another call now...", "I'm away from my desk now...", etc.). The DTMF status signals sent by the PBX are explained below. [DTMF Status Signals] Status 146 Condition DTMF Status Signal Ringback Tone The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension. 1 Busy Tone The called extension is busy. 2 Reorder Tone The dialled number is invalid. 3 DND Tone The called extension has set DND ( Do Not Disturb (DND)). Answer The called extension has answered the call. 5 Confirm The PBX confirms that a feature (such as Message Waiting) has been set or cancelled on the extension. 9 Disconnect The caller has hung up. #9 FWD to VM Ringback Tone The called extension has set FWD to VPS ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS. 6 FWD to VM Busy Tone The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy. 7 Feature Guide 1.3.1.3 4 1.19 Voice Mail Features Status FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Condition DTMF Status Signal The PBX is calling an extension other than the one dialled, most likely because the called extension has set its calls to be forwarded to another extension or because it is a member of an idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). 8 System Programming The following settings to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS. This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP series VPS, which can be connected to up to 4 extension jacks of the PBX. [Programming Example: Voice Mail Table] Voice Mail Port*2 DTMF Integration*1 Enable *1 *2 *3 Numbering Plan*3 Jack 07 Jack 08 Jack 15 Jack 16 Enable Enable Disable Disable Plan 1 or Plan 2 DTMF Integration [103] DTMF Integration Port [102] Extension Number [009] In this example: To enable the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain, programme as follows: 1) Assign all Voice Mail extensions to one extension group in Extension Group [600]. 2) Assign "Enable" to the group in Hunting Group Set [100]. 3) Select the hunting type of the group in Hunting Type [101]. VM Service 1. Accessing a Mailbox The PBX sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Follow-on ID). 2. Listening to Recorded Messages After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access. When the button is pressed, the PBX calls the voice mail extension, then sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate the extension's mailbox number. A single line telephone (SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number. Conditions • A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features: Feature Guide 147 1.19 Voice Mail Features – – – • • • FWD—All Calls FWD—Busy/No Answer DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing, 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. In order to achieve proper recording quality, Data Line Security should be turned on for the VPS ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security). Each extension's mailbox number is the same as its extension number. If "TA series" cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX-TVP series VPS, select "KXT1232". Follow the steps for the KX-T1232. User Manual References 1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 148 Feature Guide 1.20 Administrative Information Output Features 1.20 Administrative Information Output Features 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Description Automatically logs detailed information for the PBX. 1. SMDR Output Port The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) data to a PC, printer, etc. 2. SMDR Output Data Outside (CO) line call information (Incoming/outgoing) can be logged and sent to the SMDR output port. 3. SMDR Format and Contents Date Time Ext. CO Dial number 12/31/04 12:52PM 103 05 12345678901234567890123456789012 12/31/04 12:53PM 103 02 < incoming Duration Code 00:00'16" .... > 2013570846 00:01'43" .... 00:07'48" 00:00'43" .... .... 12/31/04 *12:54PM 101 02 12/31/04 12:55PM 101B 02 < incoming < BV incoming > 1234567890123456 > 2013570846 12/31/04 12:56PM 107B 03 < DIL incoming > 0921234557 00:01'43" .... 00:00'06" 4536 > 2013570846 00:00'09" .... 0 > 00:00'08" .... 0 00:00'08" .... 00:00'17" .... 2 01 0921234567 00:11'00" . . 13 2:15PM 103 01 0921234567 00:11'00" .101 12/31/04 2:26PM 103 01 F/0927654321 00:03'00" .... 12/31/04 2:27PM 116 05 9=0924567123 00:13'55" .... 12/31/04 3:25PM 02 00:11'48" .... 12/31/04 1:04PM 103 06 092. . . 1438 12/31/04 1:04PM 102 05 < DISA incoming 12/31/04 1:05PM 103 01 < DISA incoming 12/31/04 1:06PM 103 01 092123456789 12/31/04 1:06PM C-05 02 0921234567 12/31/04 1:07PM 103 12/31/04 (1) (2) (3) (4) < UCD waiting > (5) (6) (7) Feature Guide 149 1.20 Administrative Information Output Features [Explanation] The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. The section numbers below refer to the field indicated by the numbers above. Section Number 150 Feature Guide Data Description (1) Date Shows the date (Month/Day/Year) of the call ( Date & Time [000]). The date order varies depending on the user's country/ area. (2) Time Shows the start time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM. Also shows the following code: *: Transferred call ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer) (3) Ext. (Extension) Shows the number of the extension that was engaged in the call. Also shows the following codes: xxxB: Call answered by the BV feature ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)) (xxx=Number of the extension to which the call was directed before the BV feature answered) Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged. C-xx: Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) line call via the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) (xx=Outside (CO) line number that receives the DISA call) (4) CO Shows the outside (CO) line number used for the call. 1.20 Administrative Information Output Features Section Number (5) Data Dial Number Description [Outside (CO) Line Call] Outgoing Outside (CO) Line Call Shows the dialled telephone number (max. 32 digits). Digits shown are as follows: 0 through 9, , #, - (hyphen) F/: Flash/recall signal ( 1.10.6 Flash/Recall) =: Host PBX Access code marker ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) The marker is displayed between the Host PBX Access code and the dialled number when a Host PBX Access code is entered. . (dot): Secret Dialling Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Shows <incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits). A caller's telephone number is displayed only when an optional Caller ID card is installed and "With CID" is selected in Caller ID SMDR Format [906]. It is also possible to show a caller's telephone number before the call is answered ( Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]). Also shows the following codes: <DISA incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits): Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DISA feature <BV incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call to the common message area of the BV feature <DIL incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DIL feature ( 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL)) <UCD waiting>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature ( 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)) When the UCD waiting call is answered, a new record is started. (6) Duration Shows the duration of the outside (CO) line call or the UCD call waiting time in hours/minutes/seconds. (7) Code Shows the account code appended to the call ( 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry), the account code index number (e.g., 13), the number of the extension that used the Walking COS feature (e.g., 101), or DISA security code status (e.g., 0). 0: A DISA incoming call without a DISA security code 1 to 4: A DISA incoming call with a DISA security code number Actual DISA security codes are not printed by SMDR ( DISA Security Code [512]). Feature Guide 151 1.20 Administrative Information Output Features The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are printed or displayed by SMDR. [Programmable Items] Item Description Incoming/Outgoing outside (CO) line call Controls whether incoming/outgoing outside (CO) line calls are shown ( Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]). Even if "On" or "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls or even if "On" is selected for incoming outside (CO) line calls, when "MODE 2" is selected in SMDR Mode for Printing [929], the call log information is not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout. If "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls, only calls that are checked in TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] and are allowed, are shown. Caller's identification Controls whether a caller's telephone number is shown ( Caller ID SMDR Format [906]). When this is set to display telephone numbers, even if the PBX receives a caller's name by the Caller ID feature, only the telephone number is shown. Secret Dialling Controls whether secret dialling numbers stored in System Speed Dialling Number [001] or stored in One-touch Dialling button are shown by SMDR ( Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]). Account Code Controls whether the account code stored in Account Code [310] or just the index of the account code is shown ( SMDR Account Code [805]). The index of the account code is shown when "Verify-All" or "Verify-Toll" is selected in Account Code Mode [605]. System programming items Controls whether system programming items that have already been assigned are shown based on the following parameters ( System Data Dump [804]): a) All para: All data b) System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para", "DSS para" and "Speed dial" c) CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line d) Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console f) Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number [001] and System Speed Dialling Name [011] g) Stop output: Not shown Conditions • 152 Multilingual Display by SMDR It is possible to select the display language used for SMDR through system programming ( Language [806]). Feature Guide SMDR 1.20 Administrative Information Output Features • • The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) after the end of seizing an outside (CO) line or dialling before starting the SMDR timer for outgoing outside (CO) line calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone (PT) shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR. SMDR Format The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming ( SMDR Parameter [801]) in order to match the paper size being used by the printer: a) Page Length: determines the number of lines per page. b) Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length. Skip Perforation Page Length (66 lines) Machine Perforation • Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) through system programming ( SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]): a) New Line (NL) Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR". If not, select "CR+LF". b) Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer. c) Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character. d) Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer. e) Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string that composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer. Installation Manual References 2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals Feature Guide 153 1.20 Administrative Information Output Features 1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension Description An extension assigned as the manager extension can use the following features through manager programming: a) Call Log Print Out, Reference, and Clear, for Each Extension b) All Clear [Example] The manager can print out call logs for each extension. Up to 500 outgoing outside (CO) line calls can be logged in the PBX. When the call log is full, the oldest call will be replaced each time a call is received. The call logs stored since the manager cleared the call log for the extension can be printed out. ********************************************** * 103 : Tony Viola * ********************************************** Starting Date Present Date (1) Date Time 12/31/04 *12:52PM 12/31/04 1:06PM 12/31/04 1:07PM 12/31/04 2:15PM 12/31/04 2:26PM : Dec.29.04 07:00PM** : Dec.31.04 09:00AM Ext. CO Dial number Duration Code 103 103 103 103 103 05 01 01 01 01 12345678901234567890123456789012 092123456789 0921234567 0921234567 F/0927654321 00:00'16" 00:00'08" 00:11'00" 00:11'00" 00:03'00" .... .... ..13 .101 .... (1) "Starting Date" shows the start date (Month/Day/Year) of the call log. When it is different from "Present Date", "**" is shown, indicating that there may be overwritten calls that are not shown on the print out. Conditions • • Even if an extension user holds a call, the duration of the call will be counted. If an extension user transfers the call, the count of duration will restart at the destination extension. SMDR Mode for Printing One of the following modes can be selected through system programming ( SMDR Mode for Printing [929]): a) MODE 1 Outside (CO) line call information can be displayed by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), and call log information for each extension can be displayed by Call Log Printout. b) MODE 2 Only call log information for each extension can be displayed by Call Log Printout. User Manual References 3.2.2 Viewing, Printing, and Clearing Call Logs 154 Feature Guide 1.21 Extension Controlling Features 1.21 Extension Controlling Features 1.21.1 Extension Feature Clear Description Extension users can simultaneously clear all of the following features set on their own telephone: Feature Value after Extension Feature Clear Absent Message Off Automatic Callback Busy Off Background Music (BGM) Off Call Forwarding (FWD) Off Call Pickup Deny Allow Call Waiting Disable Data Line Security Off Do Not Disturb (DND) Off Executive Busy Override Deny Allow Hot Line The stored telephone numbers will be cleared. Log-in/Log-out Log-in Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be cleared. Paging Deny Allow Room Monitor Off Timed Reminder Cleared Voice Mail Integration Off This feature is also known as Station Feature Clear or Station Programme Clear. User Manual References 1.7.8 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear) Feature Guide 155 1.21 Extension Controlling Features 1.21.2 Timed Reminder Description Each extension user can set an alarm to be used as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be programmed to activate daily or one time only. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. Remote Timed Reminder An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely set, cancel, and confirm the timed reminder of the desired extension. This feature is useful, for example, for a small hotel or motel to set a wake-up call for an extension in a guest room, or for a parent to set a wake-up call for an extension in a child's room. Conditions • • • Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time. Setting a new alarm time clears the previous alarm time. There is no limit for the number of the extensions that can set Timed Reminder at the same time. User Manual References 1.7.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder) 2.1.3 Setting an Alarm for Other Extensions (Remote Timed Reminder [Wake-up Call]) 156 Feature Guide 1.22 Audible Tone Features 1.22 Audible Tone Features 1.22.1 Dial Tone Description The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions: Type Description Tone 1 A normal dial tone is heard when none of the features listed for dial tones 2 through 5 have been set. Tone 2 Heard when any of the following features is set. • Absent Message • Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones [PTs] only) • Call Forwarding (FWD) • Call Pickup Deny • Data Line Security • Do Not Disturb (DND) • Extension Lock • Hot Line (for single line telephones [SLTs] only) • Message Waiting (for PTs only) • Remote Extension Lock • Timed Reminder Tone 3 Heard when any of the following features is performed. • Account Code Entry • Answering a call from Timed Reminder • Going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting Tone 4 Heard when going off-hook if new voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]). Tone 5 Heard when going off-hook if the remaining voice message recording time is less than 5 minutes or if 125 voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]). Conditions • Dial Tone Type for ARS Through system programming, it is possible to select the dial tone type for the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) feature ( ARS Dial Tone [362]). Feature Guide References 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones Feature Guide 157 1.22 Audible Tone Features 1.22.2 Confirmation Tone Description At the end of a feature operation, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user. Type Description Tone 1 Sent when the setting is accepted, or sent when the Extension Lock feature is set or cancelled. Tone 2 Sent when the new setting is identical to the previous one, or sent when certain features are successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold, Automatic Callback Busy). Tone 3 Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following features: • Call Pickup • Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number • Conference • Paging/Paging Answer Conditions • It is possible to eliminate confirmation tone 3 (except for Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number) through system programming. Feature Guide References 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones 158 Feature Guide Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Feature Guide 159 2.1 System Configuration—Hardware 2.1 System Configuration—Hardware 2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration Description Extension jacks are used to connect proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) to the PBX. Conditions • • • 160 PT and SLT in Parallel Mode A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack and used in parallel mode. DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system programming ( DSS Console Jack Assignment [003], Console Paired Telephone [004]). Each extension jack number should be unique. Automatic Detection A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack with no programming required. Feature Guide 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Description Each extension is assigned a class of service (COS) number ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]). The following features operate differently depending on an extension's COS. a) TRS ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)) b) Walking COS ( 1.8.4 Walking COS) Conditions • Walking COS An extension user can make a call from an extension with a lower COS by using his or her own COS temporarily. User Manual References 1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS) Feature Guide 161 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.2 Group Description This PBX supports various types of groups. 1. Outside (CO) Line Group Outside (CO) lines can be grouped into 8 outside (CO) line groups based on properties such as carrier or outside (CO) line type ( CO Line Group Number [404]). Each outside (CO) line can belong to only one outside (CO) line group. 2. Extension Group Extensions can be grouped into 8 extension groups ( Extension Group [600]). Each extension group can have the following attribute set: a) b) c) d) e) Call Pickup Group Paging Group Idle Extension Hunting Group Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group Every extension must belong to one extension group and cannot belong to more than one extension group. Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephones (PTs)/single line telephones (SLTs) [Example] Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extension Group 4 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 Extn. 108 2.1. Call Pickup Group Using the Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which they belong. 2.2. Paging Group Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group, or answer a page made to any group. 2.3. Idle Extension Hunting Group If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same extension group ( Hunting Group Set [100]). When calls are received, idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101]): Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting. 2.4. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group A UCD group is a group of extensions that receives UCD calls directed to the group ( UCD Group [520]). To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]). 162 Feature Guide 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group A DISA ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All extensions in the group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination ( DISA Built-in AA [501]) ring simultaneously. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and "With AA" must be selected as the destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). Feature Guide References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 1.14.1 Paging Feature Guide 163 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.3 Time Service Description Time service modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of day. For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice Processing System (VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long-distance calls during lunch time, etc. There are 3 time service modes—day, night, and lunch. The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode are programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table. 1. Time Service Switching Mode The current time service mode can switch automatically to another time service mode at the time assigned in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time service modes manually. Whether time service modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through system programming ( Time Service Switching Mode [006]). Switching Mode Automatic Description Condition The current time service mode will switch automatically to another time service mode at the time assigned in the Time Table, and can be switched manually by pressing the Day, Night, or Lunch button or by entering the Time Service feature number. The current time service mode (day/night/lunch) and the switching mode (automatic/manual) can be switched manually by an extension assigned as the operator or The current time service mode will switch only manager extension. when the Day, Night, or Lunch button is pressed or when the Time Service feature number is entered. Manual 2. Time Table A Time Table has 3 modes—day, night, and lunch. A Time Table can be programmed to control when each time service mode starts (and therefore, the previous time service mode ends), and can be programmed separately for each day of the week. [Programming Example: Time Table] Time Schedule* * 164 Day Night Start Time Start Time Start Time End Time Sunday Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Monday 09:00 17:00 12:00 13:00 Tuesday 09:00 17:00 12:00 13:00 (Cont.) : : : : : : : : : : Time Service Start Time [007] Feature Guide Lunch 2.2 System Configuration—Software [Visualisation of Time Schedule] Monday 00:00 Tuesday 03:00 06:00 09:00 12:00 15:00 18:00 21:00 00:00 Time Table Night Day Lunch Day Lunch Day Night Night Note that time service modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur in the morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time service modes need to be used in a time schedule. Also note that day mode or night mode resumes automatically when lunch mode ends. 3. Programming Items Using Time Service The following programming items will be affected by the time service: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407] Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413] CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only) DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603] Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705] 4. Day/Night/Lunch Button A flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can customised as a Day, Night, or Lunch button by the operator or manager. These buttons can be used to switch the current time service mode. Each button shows the current status as follows: Light Pattern Status Off Day/Night/Lunch off Red on Day/Night/Lunch on Note Extension users can press the "#" key on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current time service mode. Conditions • The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode can be specified through system programming ( Time Service Start Time [007]). Feature Guide 165 2.2 System Configuration—Software Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1.7.7 Checking the Time Service Mode 2.1.2 Switching the Time Service Mode (Time Service) 166 Feature Guide 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features Description This PBX supports one operator and one manager. Any extension can be designated as the operator through system programming ( Operator Assignment [008]). The operator is the destination of Operator Call. The extension connected to extension jack 01 is the manager extension. An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension is allowed to use certain features that most extensions cannot, as follows: Feature Manager Programming Description Manager Password* Details in System Speed Sets the System Speed Dialling Number Dialling number. [001] Required • 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling— Personal/System System Speed Dialling Name [011] Sets the System Speed Dialling name. Required • 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling— Personal/System DISA Security Code [512] Sets the DISA security code. Required • 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Security Code Digits [530] Sets the number of digits for Required the DISA security code. • 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Required Call Log Printout Prints, views, and clears for Each call logs for each extension. Extension • 1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension Required Sets the extension password. This password is used for the Walking COS feature and the Remote Extension Lock feature. Each extension's password should be unique. – Remote Extension Lock Sets or cancels Extension Lock on an extension remotely. Not required • 1.8.3 Extension Lock Time Service Switches the time service mode manually. Not required • 2.2.3 Time Service Extension Password Set Remote Timed Reminder (Wake-up Sets or cancels Timed Not required Call) Reminder to any extension remotely. • 1.21.2 Timed Reminder Incoming Call Log in the Common Clears all Caller ID Area—CLEAR ALL information stored in the common area. • 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Not required Feature Guide 167 2.2 System Configuration—Software Feature Description Incoming Call Log Display Lock in Locks or unlocks the the Common Area Incoming Call Log for the common area. Manager Password* Details in Not required • 1.8.3 Extension Lock • 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Selects how new calls are Not required Common Area treated when Incoming Call Log for the common area is full. • 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD Not required Records and plays back OGMs used by DISA, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), and 3-level Automated Attendant (AA). Erases OGMs used by DISA and UCD. • 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD Date and Time Setting Adjusts the current date and time. – Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL Cancels Extension Lock at Not required all extensions. • 1.8.3 Extension Lock LCS Password Control Clears the Live Call Not required Screening (LCS) password. • 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration Common BV OGM Not required Records, plays back, and erases a common BV OGM in the common message area that can be accessed by either the operator or manager. • 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) Not required * The system password may be entered instead of the extension password for the manager (manager password). Operator Call An extension user can call the operator by entering the Operator Call number ( Automatic Line Access [121]), often simply, "0". If no operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone. If the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "0" through system programming, the Operator Call number will be changed to "9". Note For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9. User Manual References 1.2.1 Basic Calling 2.1 Control Features 3.2.2 Viewing, Printing, and Clearing Call Logs 168 Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.1 PC Programming Description System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance Console software as well as by using a proprietary telephone (PT) ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). System programming and data upload/download can be performed either through on-site programming or remote programming. 1. On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to the PBX. 2. Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the PBX via an outside (CO) line. 1. Connection Methods for On-site Programming Method Description Required Hardware Serial Interface (RS232C port) The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) of the PBX. — USB The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port — of the PBX. Feature Guide 169 2.3 System Data Control 2. Connection Methods for Remote Programming Method Remote modem Description Required Hardware User-supplied modem Call the PBX and have the call directed to the internal modem using one of the following methods: Direct Access: Using a modem, dial the telephone number to connect to the internal modem. To use this feature, "MODEM" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]). DISA: Using a telephone, dial the telephone number to reach the DISA line ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)). After hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM), enter the Remote Maintenance feature number to access the internal modem. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]). Call Transfer: Using a telephone, call an extension user, such as the operator, to request to be transferred to the internal modem using the Remote Maintenance feature number ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer). When the modem answer tone is heard, the PBX is ready for access. Conditions • • • • • • Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied to a second party who tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT. System programming can be performed either in interactive or batch mode. System Password To access system programming in interactive mode, a valid password must be entered. The password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password [002]). A user can upload system programming data from a PC to the PBX or download it from the PBX to a PC. If communications between the PBX and PC fail before completing Firmware Upgrade or system programming data upload from a PC to the PBX, the successfully transferred portion of the data can still be used. Firmware Upgrade can be performed only through on-site programming using Serial Interface (RS232C port) or USB. Installation Manual References 3.2 Connection 3.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console 170 Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL) 3.2 PC Programming Feature Guide 171 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.2 PT Programming Description A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customise the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the following programming features: Programming Type Description Example Authorised Programmer Personal Programming Used by an extension user to customise the extension's settings. One-touch Dialling, Line Preference— Outgoing, etc. Extension user System Programming Used by an authorised party to customise the PBX. System Password, Authorised Extension Number, etc. administrator Manager Programming Used by the manager to customise 4 system programming settings of the PBX, set a password to each extension, and print out call log information for each extension. System Speed Dialling Manager Number, Extension Password Set, Call Log Printout for Each Extension, etc. Conditions • • • • • • • The manager extension is the extension that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack (jack 01) of the PBX and can therefore perform manager programming. Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is permitted at a time. These 2 programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by 2 users. During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls. System Password To access system programming, the administrator system password must be entered. The system password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password [002]). The administrator can programme all system programming. Manager Password To set the manager password, it is necessary to use the system password to perform Extension Password Set. Once set, the manager password can be used to access manager programming. The manager can assign a password to each extension (extension password). Personal Programming Data Reset A PT user can simultaneously reset all settings made through personal programming (Line Preference—Incoming/Outgoing, Call Waiting Tone Type Selection, etc.) to their default settings. This feature also cancels pressing the AUTO ANS/MUTE button in the Hands-free Answerback feature and the Room Monitor feature. System Programming Data Reset The PBX can return all or specific settings made through system programming to their default settings based on the following parameters ( System Data Clear [999]): a) b) c) d) 172 All para: All data System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para", and "DSS para" CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console f) Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number [001] and System Speed Dialling Name [011] Installation Manual References 2.10.1 Starting the Advanced Hybrid System Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features 3.3 PT Programming User Manual References 3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming) 3.2 Managing Call Logs 3.3 Customising Your PBX (System Programming) Feature Guide 173 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment Description The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically according to the time information received from your telephone company. Time information can be received when an incoming call with Caller ID that includes time information is received. The PBX clock will be adjusted every day with the first call after 3:05 A.M., if enabled through system programming ( Automatic Time Adjustment [152]). Note Since the PBX clock is put ahead by one hour on the Summer Time start date, a timed reminder set within one hour of the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will not ring. Since the PBX clock is put back by one hour on the Summer Time end date, a timed reminder set within one hour before the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will ring 2 times. Conditions • SMDR will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging time will be overlapped at the end of Summer Time ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). Feature Guide References 1.21.2 Timed Reminder 174 Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.4 Feature Numbering Description To call another extension user or to access PBX features, access numbers (extension numbers or feature numbers) are required. Feature numbers are available while: 1. 2. 3. 4. a dial tone is heard a busy, Do Not Disturb (DND), ringback tone is heard dialling or talking on-hook 1. Feature Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard) Extension numbers and features that are available while a dial tone is heard have fixed numbers and flexible numbers respectively, shown in the following table: a) Extension Numbers: The extension numbering plan can be selected through system programming ( Extension Number [009]). When the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change automatically as follows*: Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 101 through 124 Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 11 through 34 If a rotary single line telephone (SLT) is used at any extension, select "Plan 1". Note * For United Kingdom and New Zealand, when the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change automatically as follows: Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 201 through 224 Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 21 through 44 b) Feature Numbers: When "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected, feature numbers starting with "7" are useable with and without "#" added before "7". [Example] The default feature number for setting "Do Not Disturb (DND)" is "714#". "714#" and "#714#" are both available for "Plan 2" and "Plan 3". To make them easier to remember, it may be helpful to replace the new feature numbers for "Plan 2" and "Plan 3" with the code numbers 50 through 59, through system programming ( Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]). Feature Guide 175 2.3 System Data Control [Feature Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)] Numbering Feature Additional Number Plan 1 Absent Message (set/cancel) Account Code Entry for an SLT Plan 3 75 (1–6 [+ parameter]/ 0) + #/0 account code + outside phone no. 49 or Automatic Line Access (Local Access)*1 9/0 outside phone no. Built-in Voice Message (BV) (record/play/ erase) 725 ([1 + extn. no.]/2/0) + #/0 Call Forwarding (FWD)—All Calls, Busy/No Answer (set/cancel) 71 ([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/ 0) + #/0 Call Hold (Hold Mode 2 or 3) for an SLT 20 #20 Call Hold Retrieve for outside (CO) line calls/ intercom calls 53/5 #59/#5 outside (CO) line no. (1–8)/extn. no. Call Park/Call Park Retrieve*2 22/52 #22/#56 0–9 Call Pickup Deny (set/cancel) 72 (1/0) + #/0 Call Waiting for intercom calls/doorphone calls (set/cancel) 732 (1/0) + #/0 Call Waiting for outside (CO) line calls (set/ cancel) 731 (1/0) + #/0 Common BV Outgoing Message (OGM) (record/play/erase) 722 01–24 + (1/2/0) + #/0 Conference (5-party) 22 Data Line Security (set/cancel) Directed Call Pickup Doorphone Call/Door Open (phone no. + CONF) 4 times + CONF #22 730 4 Do Not Disturb (DND) (set/cancel) (1/0) + #/0 #41 extn. no. 71 31/55 (4/0) + #/0 #31/#55 1–4 Executive Busy Override Deny (set/cancel) 733 (0/1) + #/0 Extension Lock (set/cancel) 77 0000–9999 (2 times/ one time) + #/0 Extension Number*3 176 Plan 2 100–199 100–499 10–49 External Feature Access (EFA) for an SLT 6 Extension Feature Clear 79 #/0 FWD—Follow Me (set/cancel) 71 (5/8) + extn. no. + #/ 0 FWD to BV (set/cancel) 71 ([1 or 2 + 725]/0) + #/ 0 Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control Numbering Feature Additional Number Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3 FWD to Outside (CO) Line (set/cancel) 71 (3 + outside (CO) line access no. + outside phone no. + #)/(0 + #/0) FWD to Voice Processing System (VPS) (set/cancel) 71 ([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/ 0) + #/0 Group Call Pickup 40 #40 Hot Line for an SLT (programme) 74 2 + phone no. + # Hot Line for an SLT (set/cancel) 74 (1/0) + #/0 Incoming Call Log in the Personal Area— CLEAR ALL Incoming Call Log in the Common Area— CLEAR ALL Last Number Redial for an SLT # 70 # 70 ## or 80 ### or 80 Live Call Screening (LCS) Password (set/ cancel) 77 000–999 (2 times/ one time) + # Log-in/Log-out 736 (0/1) + #/0 Logging of Caller ID Information in the Common Area (set/cancel) 738 (2/0) + #/0 Logging of Caller ID Information in the Personal Area (set/cancel) 738 (1/0) + #/0 Message Waiting (leave/cancel for a caller) 70 (1/2) + extn. no. + #/ 0 Message Waiting (cancel all for a called extension) 70 0 + #/0 Message Waiting (cancel all for another extension) 70 3 + extn. no. + # Message Waiting Answer for an SLT 784 #/0 Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock (set/cancel) 70 4000–9999 (2 times/ one time) + #/0 Operator Call 0/9 Outside (CO) Line Group Access 8 1–8 + outside phone no. Paging—All Extensions & External 33 #33 Paging—All Extensions/Group 33 #33 Paging—External 34 #34 Paging Answer 43 #43 Paging Deny (set/cancel) 734 or 9 0/1–8 (1/0) + # Feature Guide 177 2.3 System Data Control Numbering Feature Additional Number Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3 Personal BV OGM (record/play/erase) 723 (1/2/0) + #/0 Personal Speed Dialling (confirm) 3 0–9 + # Personal Speed Dialling (dial) 1 or # 1 or ## 0–9 Personal Speed Dialling (programme) 2 Remote Maintenance 729 Remote Timed Reminder (set/cancel/ confirm) 764 extn. no. + # + 76 + ([hhmm + parameter]*4/2/3) + # Room Monitor (set/cancel) 735 (1/0) + # Room Monitor through a doorphone 31 0–9 + phone no. + # #31 System Speed Dialling for an SLT (dial) 1–4 00–99 Timed Reminder (set/cancel) 76 ([hhmm + parameter]*4/2) + #/0 Timed Reminder (confirm) 76 3+# Time Service (set/cancel) 78 ([1–3]/0) + # Walking COS 7 extn. password + the user's extn. no. + #/0 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite the oldest call) 737 (0/1) + # 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite the oldest call) 737 (2/3) + # *1 *2 *3 *4 For New Zealand: 1 or 9 For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 36/56; Plan 2/Plan 3: #36/#56 For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–499, Plan 3: 20–49 hh: hour (01–12), mm: minute (00–59), AM/PM (0/1), one time/daily (1/2) 2. Feature Numbering (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard) Features that are available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table: [Feature Numbering Table (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)] Feature 178 Numbering Automatic Callback Busy 6 Busy Station Signalling (BSS)/DND Override 2 Executive Busy Override 3 Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control 3. Feature Numbering (available while dialling or talking) Features that are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table: [Feature Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)] Feature Numbering Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 4*1 Conference (3-party) for an SLT 3*2 Door Open 5 Pulse to Tone Conversion *1 *2 # Dial after dialling the TAM's extension number and hearing its busy tone. Plan 1: 3; Plan 2/Plan 3: #3 4. Feature Numbering (available while on-hook) Features that are available while on-hook have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table: [Feature Numbering Table (available while on-hook)] Feature Numbering Background Music (BGM) set/cancel 1 Time Service mode display # Extension number and extension name display/ date (month/day) and time display/ date (month/day/year/day of the week) display changing Conditions • • If a feature number includes " " or "#" except for those that can use "0" instead of "#", rotary SLT users cannot use it. Feature number + Additional number (Parameter) Certain feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by "0". User Manual References 4.2.1 Feature Number Table Feature Guide 179 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type Description The dialling mode (DTMF [Dual Tone Multi-Frequency]/Pulse) of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed [402] is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside (CO) line is Call Blocking. Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC). Conditions • • • • If no outside (CO) lines are connected to the outside (CO) line ports of the PBX, the default values are assigned automatically. It takes a maximum of 4 minutes to complete checking the dialling mode, unless the outside (CO) line is in use. In this case, the PBX will start checking it after the outside (CO) line becomes idle. This feature will not function properly when: – It takes 3 seconds or more to detect the dialling mode of your telephone company. – The cable from the outside (CO) line is disconnected while the PBX is checking the dialling mode. If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority: Pulse (Low) Pulse (High) DTMF Installation Manual References 4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear Feature Guide References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection 180 Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.6 Country Setting Description The country code of the PBX can be selected through system programming ( Country [995]). The PBX will restart with the default settings of the user's country/area. During this operation, communication between the PBX and PC will be disconnected one time. Country Setting can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC). Conditions • This feature is only available when the suffix of the connected PBX is "NE" or "CE". Feature Guide 181 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade Description It is possible to upgrade the PBX software via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) or USB port using the KXTE Maintenance Console software. Even if a user upgrades the PBX software, the system data will not be lost. For more information on how to upgrade the PBX software, refer to the on-line help. Conditions • The ROM and the firmware version can be confirmed through system programming ( Version [998]). Installation Manual References 2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals 182 Feature Guide Firmware 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer Description If the power supply to the PBX fails, specific single line telephones (SLTs) are automatically connected to specific outside (CO) lines (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to Power Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected. Only outside (CO) line calls handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure. Conditions • • • • During a power failure, each of the following outside (CO) lines will be connected to an assigned extension. Outside (CO) line 1: extension jack 01 Outside (CO) line 4: extension jack 09 Outside (CO) line 7: extension jack 17 Only outside (CO) line calls are possible during a power failure. All other features will not function. We recommend connecting an SLT in parallel at extension jacks 01, 09, and 17, so that the SLT can be used during a power failure. Automobile-type batteries, which must be user-supplied, can be connected as a system backup power supply to operate all the features during a power failure. The batteries can be connected directly to the unit with optional cables. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual. Installation Manual References 2.2.6 Connecting Backup Batteries 2.9 Power Failure Connections Feature Guide References 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone Feature Guide 183 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 2.4.2 Power Failure Restart Description When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts and automatically loads stored data. Conditions • 184 In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy ( 1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)), Call Park ( 1.12.2 Call Park), and Redial ( 1.6.1.4 Redial). Feature Guide Section 3 Programming Instructions Feature Guide 185 3.1 Introduction 3.1 Introduction 3.1.1 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. The PBX has default settings that can be changed to meet your needs. These settings control the manner in which the PBX features described in this Feature Guide function, and changing these settings is referred to as "system programming". System programming can be performed by only one person at a time. A second person attempting to programme the system will be denied access to system programming. Ways to Programme There are 2 programming methods: • PC Programming PC programming is described in Section 3.2 PC Programming. • PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming PT programming is described in Section 3.3 PT Programming. An authorised administrator or the manager can perform system programming by entering 3-digit programming numbers with a PT. Password Security To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming. When KX-TE Maintenance Console is started for the first time, the Quick Setup utility will ask you to set the system password. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password. Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password 1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it becomes known to others. 2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the password. 3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits. 4. Please change the password periodically. 5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC, and checking the password using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files. Note This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only. 186 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.1 Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console To programme and administer the PBX by PC (Personal Computer), you need to install KX-TE Maintenance Console onto the PC. To install and start KX-TE Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC). KXTE Maintenance Console starts the programme using the drive where you installed the software automatically. System Requirements Operating System • Microsoft ® Windows ® 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP Hardware • • • CPU: 133 MHz Intel ® Pentium ® or faster RAM: At least 64 megabytes (MB) of available RAM (128 MB recommended) Hard disk space: At least 100 MB of space for the installation, and approximately 2 MB of additional space for user files. Feature Guide 187 3.3 PT Programming 3.3 PT Programming 3.3.1 Programming Instructions Required Telephone PBX settings can be customised through system programming by using a proprietary telephone (PT) with a display, such as the KX-T7730. An authorised administrator or the manager extension connected to the extension jack 01 can access system programming. Only one system programming session can be performed at a time; that is, only one user can access system programming at a time. This includes PC programming. Buttons and Functions Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735) Function PREV (PREVIOUS) NEXT – – SECRET STORE PAUSE PROGRAM END SELECT 188 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735) Function FLASH CLEAR Entering System Programming Mode Using a PT to perform system programming allows an authorised administrator to set a wide range of PBX features and parameters. To enter system programming mode, the system password is required. With the system password, all system programming is accessible. # PROGRAM System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming Programming No. 3 digits 1234 Note means default value throughout these programming instructions. Entering Manager Programming Mode Using a PT to perform manager programming allows the manager extension (extension jack 01) to set certain PBX features and parameters. To enter manager programming mode, the extension password for the manager (manager password) is required. With the manager password, the following 4 system programming settings are accessible: • System Speed Dialling Number [001] • System Speed Dialling Name [011] • DISA Security Code [512] • DISA Security Code Digits [530] # PROGRAM Notes • • Extension Password for Manager —for PT Programming Programming No. 3 digits The system password may be entered instead of the manager password. With the manager password, the manager can also set a password to each extension, and print out call log information for each extension. For more information on how to assign a password to each extension including the manager password and to print out call log information for each extension, refer to the User Manual ( 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode, 3.2.2 Viewing, Printing, and Clearing Call Logs). Feature Guide 189 3.3 PT Programming Entering Characters The PT's dialling buttons can be used to enter characters when storing a name or message. The following tables depict the available characters: Table 1 (Alphabet mode)/Table 2 (Numeral mode) 190 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Table 3 (Cyrillic alphabet mode for RU [Russia]/UA [Ukraine] model) * This character is only available for the KX-T7735RU. [Example of Entering Characters] To enter "Ann": n A 2 Notes • 6 n (5 times) OR 6 (5 times) To toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" or between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic alphabet mode (assignable only in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] )", and "Numeral mode", press SELECT. • To move the cursor right, press . • To delete all characters, press CLEAR. To delete a character, press . Feature Guide 191 3.3 PT Programming List of Abbreviations A AA Automated Attendant APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone ARS Automatic Route Selection BGM Background Music BV Built-in Voice Message CO Outside (CO) Line COS Class of Service CPC Calling Party Control DIL Direct In Line DISA Direct Inward System Access DND Do Not Disturb DRD Distinctive Ring Detection DSS Direct Station Selection DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency E EFA External Feature Access G GRP Group I IRNA Intercept Routing—No Answer L LCS Live Call Screening O OGM Outgoing Message P PT Proprietary Telephone S SLT Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMS Short Message Service TRS Toll Restriction TAM Telephone Answering Machine U UCD Uniform Call Distribution V VM Voice Mail B C D T 192 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming 3.3.2 Programming Procedures Notes • means default value throughout these programming instructions. • • means to select "All" throughout these programming instructions. The following are displayed when you store a number, such as a telephone number, or feature number: P: PAUSE; -: CONF; F: FLASH/RECALL; [ ]: INTERCOM x: PAUSE (substitutes for any number [i.e., wild card]) • • • To return to the previous programming item, press . To correct a wrong entry, press CLEAR and then enter the new input. To delete a stored parameter, press CLEAR, enter the new input, and then press STORE. • • Press or to scroll the display. Some programmes cannot have a value left empty. Date & Time [000] 0 0 0 NEXT âžž year (00…99) âžž SELECT (1…12) (Sun…Sat) Notes • • hour âžž âžž SELECT (Jan.…Dec.) âžž minute SELECT (00…59) day âžž (1…31) STORE END (AM/PM) The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed. The PBX supports years from 2004 to 2099. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) System Speed Dialling Number [001] NEXT or PREV To continue 0 0 1 NEXT speed dialling no. (00…99) phone no. STORE END Max. 32 digits (0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ]) To continue SELECT Notes • An Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 88) should be included before the phone number. Feature Guide 193 3.3 PT Programming • When storing an account code assigned in Account Code [310], enter after an Outside (CO) Line Access number. and the account code Feature & Programming References 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features System Password [002] 0 0 2 NEXT password STORE END 4-7 digits (0000…9999999) 1234 WARNING To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password. Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password 1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it becomes known to others. 2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the password. 3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits. 4. Please change the password periodically. 5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC, and checking the password using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files. Note This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only. Feature & Programming References 2.3.1 PC Programming 2.3.2 PT Programming 194 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] 0 0 3 NEXT DSS console no. extension jack no. (1…2) (02…24/Disable) STORE END To continue NEXT Notes • • • • or PREV To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. The same jack number cannot be assigned to 2 DSS Consoles. Do not assign extension jack 01 (manager extension) as the DSS Console jack. The extension jack number preassigned as a paired telephone in Console Paired Telephone [004] should not be assigned in this programme. Feature & Programming References 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration Console Paired Telephone [004] 0 0 4 NEXT DSS console no. extension jack no. (1…2) (01…24/Disable) STORE END To continue NEXT Notes • • • or PREV To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. The extension jack number preassigned as a DSS Console in DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] should not be assigned in this programme. An SLT cannot be paired with the DSS Console. Feature & Programming References 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] 0 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END (With Transfer/ Without Transfer) Feature Guide 195 3.3 PT Programming Note With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call. Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button, then the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call. Feature & Programming References 1.11.1 Call Transfer 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons Time Service Switching Mode [006] 0 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Manual/Automatic) Feature & Programming References 2.2.3 Time Service Time Service Start Time [007] Time Service Start Time [007] 0 0 7 NEXT NEXT or PREV (Sun…Sat) SELECT or âžž (Every day) (Day/Night/ Lunch-start/ Lunch-end) To go to another day of the week To go to another mode âžž hour or SELECT* (1…12) minute (00…59) âžž SELECT STORE END (AM/PM) To remain the settings unchanged, keep pressing SELECT until "None" is displayed Notes • • This programme is available when switching mode is enabled in automatic mode in Time Service Switching Mode [006]. * Pressing SELECT shows the previous entry. When the display shows "None", press SELECT to set the start time. Feature & Programming References 2.2.3 Time Service Operator Assignment [008] 0 0 8 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/Disable) 196 Feature Guide STORE END 3.3 PT Programming Note To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. Feature & Programming References 2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features Extension Number [009] 0 0 9 NEXT SELECT STORE (Plan 1/2/3) NEXT or PREV To continue extension jack no. NEXT extension no. (01…24) STORE END To continue SELECT Notes • • Programmable extension numbers are as follows: Plan 1: 100–199; Plan 2: 100–499; Plan 3: 10–49 (for United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–499, Plan 3: 20–49) The same extension jack number cannot be entered 2 times. Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration 2.3.4 Feature Numbering LCD Time Display [010] 0 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (12/24 h) Note The following settings and features use 12-hour format even if 24-hour format is assigned in this programme: Date & Time [000] Time Service Start Time [007] 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.21.2 Timed Reminder Feature Guide 197 3.3 PT Programming System Speed Dialling Name [011] NEXT or PREV To continue 0 1 1 NEXT speed dialling no. (00…99) name* Max. 16 characters STORE END To continue SELECT Note * A name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT. Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters Second Feature Numbering Plan [012] NEXT or PREV To continue 0 1 2 NEXT code no. (50…59) feature no. Max. 10 digits (0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ]) STORE END To continue SELECT Note This programme is available only when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009]. Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 2.3.4 Feature Numbering 198 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] NEXT or PREV To continue 0 1 3 NEXT location no. (1…9) feature no. STORE END Max. 24 digits (0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ]) To continue SELECT Notes • • Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for Personal Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function. This feature is not available when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a PT. Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Hunting Group Set [100] NEXT or PREV To continue 1 0 0 NEXT extension group no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Group [600] Hunting Type [101] NEXT or PREV To continue 1 0 1 NEXT extension group no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT STORE (Terminate/ Circular) To continue END SELECT Note This programme is available when the extension group is enabled in Hunting Group Set [100]. Feature Guide 199 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting DTMF Integration Port [102] NEXT or PREV To continue 1 0 2 extension jack no. NEXT (07, 08, 15, 16/ ) name* SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration DTMF Integration [103] 1 0 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note When a KX-TVP series VPS is connected to the PBX, to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration between the VPS and the PBX, select "Plan 1" or "Plan 2" in Extension Number [009] and "Enable" in this programme. Feature & Programming References 1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration DTMF Integration Port [102] SLT Hold Mode [104] 1 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Hold-1/Hold-2/ Hold-3) Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold Conference Tone [105] 1 0 5 NEXT SELECT (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.7.2 Executive Busy Override 1.13.1.2 Conference 200 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming External Pager Access Tone [106] 1 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.14.1 Paging DTMF Receiver Check [107] NEXT or PREV To continue 1 0 7 NEXT DTMF receiver no. (1…6/ ) name* SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note This programme enables each DTMF receiver to check whether it is operating normally or not. DTMF receiver number: 1–2: checking extension jacks 01–08 3–4: checking extension jacks 09–16 5–6: checking extension jacks 17–24 Connection References 4.1.3 Operation Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108] 1 0 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note This programme enables a locked extension to send a flash/recall signal during a conversation with an outside party. CO Indicator [109] 1 0 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note This programme is available for the extension(s) assigned not to ring in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/ Lunch [408-410], to answer incoming outside (CO) line calls. Feature Guide 201 3.3 PT Programming Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] 1 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (MODE1: EFA mode/ MODE2: Flash/Recall mode) Feature & Programming References 1.10.6 Flash/Recall 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Music on Hold [111] 1 1 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Internal/ External/Tone) Note Selections vary depending on your country/area. Feature & Programming References 1.12.4 Music on Hold 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM) DSS Lamp Mode [112] 1 1 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note Enable: FWD—Flashing slowly, DND—Flashing at moderate speed Disable: FWD—Off, DND—Off Feature & Programming References 1.18.3 LED Indication Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113] 1 1 3 NEXT SELECT (0/3/10/ 15 times) Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.4 Redial 202 Feature Guide STORE END 3.3 PT Programming Automatic Redial Interval [114] 1 1 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END (40/60 s) Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.4 Redial Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] 1 1 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Single/Double/ Triple) Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones Conference Pattern [116] 1 1 6 NEXT SELECT (3-party C-0 E-3/ 3-party C-1 E-3/ 3-party C-2 E-3/ 5-party C-2 E-5) Note 3-party C-0 E-3: No outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call. 3-party C-1 E-3: One outside party can attend a 3-party conference call. 3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call. 5-party C-2 E-5: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party to 5-party conference call. The PBX allows up to 2 outside parties to participate in a conference call. [C: CO, E: Extension] Feature & Programming References 1.13.1.2 Conference Call Pickup Tone [117] 1 1 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup Feature Guide 203 3.3 PT Programming Pulse Restriction [118] 1 1 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note It is programmable whether pulse dialling is sent or not to the telephone company during a conversation with an outside party when "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode is enabled in Dial Mode [401]. Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] 1 1 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection Bell Frequency [120] 1 2 0 NEXT SELECT (20/25 Hz) Note This programme selects the bell frequency sent to an SLT. Automatic Line Access [121] 1 2 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Dial 0/9)* Note * For New Zealand: 1 or 9 Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access 2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122] 1 2 2 NEXT SELECT (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access 204 Feature Guide STORE END 3.3 PT Programming Break Ratio [123] 1 2 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END (MODE1: 66 %/ MODE2: 60 %) Note This programme selects the pulse break ratio (the ratio between the length of the pulse and the length of the pause) when a pulse is sent to the telephone company while dialling a telephone number. TRS Check for * and # [125] 1 2 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) DSS Off-hook Mode [126] 1 2 6 NEXT SELECT (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call Pickup Group [127] NEXT or PREV To continue 1 2 7 NEXT extension group no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup CO Indicator [109] Ringback Tone Pattern [128] 1 2 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Single 3 s/Single 5 s/ Double 3 s/Double 5 s) Feature Guide 205 3.3 PT Programming Note This programme selects the ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside (CO) line calls (including a DISA call). Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones VM 1 APT Port [130] 1 3 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Port7/Port7 & 8/ Disable) Notes • • To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired setting. This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103]. Feature & Programming References 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration VM 2 APT Port [131] 1 3 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Port15/ Port15 & 16/ Disable) Notes • • To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired setting. This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103]. Feature & Programming References 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] 1 4 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END (1:2/1:3/1:4) [On:Off] Note This programme selects the ratio between the bell signals of an SLT (a set of bell-on and bell-off). 206 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] 1 4 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END (1000…2000 ms) [100 ms increments] Notes • • This programme selects the length of the bell-on signal of an SLT. This determines the ring tone pattern for incoming calls to SLTs, combined with the setting in SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]. This programme also determines the maximum number of digits of an SLT Caller ID number, when "DTMF1" or "DTMF2" is selected in SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]. Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.16.1 Caller ID SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145] 1 4 5 NEXT SMS centre no. STORE END Max. 16 digits (0…9, , #) Feature & Programming References 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS SMS Routing Table—CO [146] NEXT or PREV To continue 1 4 6 NEXT CO line no. name* SELECT (1…8) (Disable/1…8) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS Feature Guide 207 3.3 PT Programming SMS Routing Table—Extension [147] or NEXT PREV To continue 1 4 7 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24) SELECT STORE (Disable/1…8) To continue SELECT Note Each location 1–8 has a maximum of 8 extensions. Feature & Programming References 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150] 1 5 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (FSK1 [During ring]/ FSK2 [RP-AS]/ DTMF1 [Immediately]/ DTMF2 [During ring]) Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] 1 5 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID Automatic Time Adjustment [152] 1 5 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment Incoming Reverse [153] 1 5 3 NEXT SELECT (Enable/Disable) 208 Feature Guide STORE END END 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection Hold Recall Time [200] 2 0 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (30 s/ 1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/ Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold 1.12.2 Call Park Transfer Recall Time [201] 2 0 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END STORE END (15/30 s/ 1/2 min) Feature & Programming References 1.11.1 Call Transfer Call Forwarding Start Time [202] 2 0 2 NEXT SELECT (5/10/15/ 20 s delay) Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Hot Line Waiting Time [203] 2 0 3 NEXT SELECT (0…4 s) Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Call Duration Counter Start [204] 2 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END (5/10/15/20/25/30/35/ 40/45/50 s after dialling/ Instantly) Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Feature Guide 209 3.3 PT Programming Polarity Reverse Detection [424] CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205] 2 0 5 time NEXT STORE END STORE END (1…32 min) Feature & Programming References 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation Dialling Start Time [206] 2 0 6 NEXT SELECT Refer to the note.* Note * The minimum length of time that the PBX waits after seizing an outside (CO) line before dialling that can be selected depends on your country/area as follows: For Czech Republic: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 3500 ms For Others: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 1500 ms Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] 2 0 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END (MODE1: 50-180 ms/ MODE2: 80-180 ms/ MODE3: 80-650 ms/ MODE4: 80-1000 ms/ MODE5: 200-1000 ms) Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold Inter-digit Time [208] 2 0 8 NEXT SELECT (5/10/15/20 s) Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) No Dial Disconnection [211] 210 Feature Guide STORE END 3.3 PT Programming DTMF Time [210] 2 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (MODE1: 80 ms/ MODE2: 160 ms) Note This programme selects the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have been set to "DTMF" in Dial Mode [401]. Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection No Dial Disconnection [211] 2 1 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) Inter-digit Time [208] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212] 2 1 2 time NEXT STORE END (1…32 min) Note This programme is available for the extension(s) enabled in CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]. Feature & Programming References 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation Bell-off Detection [213] 2 1 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END (3/6/12 s) Note This programme selects the minimum time required by the PBX to confirm that the bell signal is no longer being sent from the telephone company, before the PBX acknowledges that the call is lost. BV Recording Time [214] 2 1 4 NEXT time STORE END (1…20 min) Feature Guide 211 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215] 2 1 5 time NEXT STORE END (1…15 min) Note This programme selects the maximum recording time for each personal/common BV OGM. Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) Carrier Exception Code [300] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 0 0 NEXT code no. carrier code STORE (01…20) Max. 10 digits (0…9, , #, x) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301] 3 0 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Class-1…5) Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 X NEXT (02…05) 02: for Class 2 03: for Class 3 04: for Class 4 05: for Class 5 212 Feature Guide code no. phone no. STORE (01…20) Max. 11 digits (0…9, , #, x) To continue SELECT END END 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) TRS—Exception Code [306] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 0 6 NEXT code no. phone no. STORE (01…80) Max. 11 digits (0…9, , #, x) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] Emergency Number [309] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 0 9 NEXT code no. (1…5) emergency no. Max. 24 digits (0…9) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) Account Code [310] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 1 0 NEXT code no. (01…50) account code 4 digits (0…9) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code Account Code Mode [605] Feature Guide 213 3.3 PT Programming Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] or PREV NEXT To continue 3 1 1 NEXT code no. pause code STORE (01…40) Max. 11 digits (0…9) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion Pause Time [417] TRS—Extension Lock Class [312] 3 1 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END (COS-2…5/ Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) 1.8.3 Extension Lock ARS Selection [350] or PREV NEXT To continue 3 5 0 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ name* SELECT ) (Enable/ Disable) STORE To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 X NEXT (51…54) 51: for Route 1 52: for Route 2 53: for Route 3 54: for Route 4 214 Feature Guide code no. area code STORE (01…80) Max. 7 digits (0…9, , #, x) To continue SELECT END END 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] or PREV NEXT To continue 3 X NEXT (55…58) code no. area code STORE (01…80) Max. 7 digits (0…9, , #, x) To continue 55: for Route 1 56: for Route 2 57: for Route 3 58: for Route 4 END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 1st Carrier Selection Code [359] 3 5 9 NEXT first carrier access code STORE END Max. 4 digits (0…9) Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 6 0 NEXT route no. (1…4) removed digits STORE END (0…9) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Feature Guide 215 3.3 PT Programming ARS Modification—Added Number [361] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 6 1 NEXT route no. added number STORE (1…4) Max. 20 digits (0…9, , #, P) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ARS Dial Tone [362] 3 6 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Tone1/Tone2/ Tone3/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.22.1 Dial Tone ARS Inter-digit Time [363] 3 6 3 NEXT time (1…20 s) Note This assignment should be the same as the inter-digit timer assigned in Inter-digit Time [208]. Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ARS CO Line Group [364] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 6 4 NEXT route no. CO line group no. (1…4) (1…8/ STORE END ) To continue SELECT Note The assignments in Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] are effective for this programme. 216 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] or PREV NEXT To continue 3 X CO line no. NEXT (1…8/ (81…84) authorisation code STORE Max. 19 digits (0…9, , #, P) To continue ) 81: for Route 1 82: for Route 2 83: for Route 3 84: for Route 4 END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 X CO line no. NEXT (1…8/ (85…88) ) 85: for Route 1 86: for Route 2 87: for Route 3 88: for Route 4 name* SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Itemised Billing Code [389] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 8 9 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) itemised billing code Max. 3 digits (0…9, , #, P) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Feature Guide 217 3.3 PT Programming Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390] NEXT or PREV To continue 3 9 0 NEXT route no. (1…4/ name* STORE SELECT ) (C.A.I.H/ C.I.A.H) END To continue SELECT Note C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing Code; H: Telephone Number Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) CO Line Connection [400] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 0 0 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ name* SELECT ) (Connect/ Not connect) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Dial Mode [401] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 0 1 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT (DTMF/Pulse/ Call Block mode) SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection 218 Feature Guide STORE To continue END 3.3 PT Programming Pulse Speed [402] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 0 2 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ name* SELECT ) (Low Speed: 10 pps/ High Speed: 20 pps) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection Dial Mode [401] Host PBX Access Code [403] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 0 3 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) access code STORE END Up to 8 access codes 1 or 2 digits To continue (0…9, , #) SELECT Note Insert "," (CONF/MESSAGE button) between each access code using the comma button on the overlay. For example, to store access codes 81 and 82 on outside (CO) line 1, programme as follows: 403 NEXT 1 81,82 STORE END Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Pause Time [417] CO Line Group Number [404] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 0 4 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) CO line group no. STORE END (1…8) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Feature Guide 219 3.3 PT Programming 2.2.2 Group Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407] or PREV NEXT To continue Go to next or prev. line number âžž âžž or To continue Go to next or prev. jack number 4 X NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ (05…07) # extension jack no. SELECT (01…24/ ) 05: for day 06: for night 07: for lunch ) STORE END (Enable/ Disable) To continue Go to another jack number To continue SELECT Go to another line number Note It is impossible to disable all extensions for all outside (CO) lines in each time service mode (day/night/ lunch). In each mode, at least one extension must be allowed to make an outside (CO) line call. Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] or PREV NEXT To continue Go to next or prev. line number âžž âžž or To continue Go to next or prev. jack number 4 X NEXT (08…10) CO line no. (1…8/ ) # extension jack no. SELECT (01…24/ 08: for day 09: for night 10: for lunch ) STORE END (Enable/ Disable) To continue SELECT Go to another jack number To continue Go to another line number 220 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection 1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413] or PREV NEXT To continue Go to next or prev. line number âžž âžž or To continue Go to next or prev. jack number 4 X NEXT (1…8/ (11…13) # CO line no. extension jack no. SELECT (01…24/ ) 11: for day 12: for night 13: for lunch ) STORE END Refer to the note.* To continue Go to another jack number To continue SELECT Go to another line number Note * The ringing start time that can be selected for extension(s) selected in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/ Lunch [408-410] depends on your country/area as follows: For United Kingdom: Immediately, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s For Others: Immediately, 5 s, 10 s, 15 s Feature & Programming References 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] <To select Normal, UCD, and/or MODEM> NEXT or PREV To continue 4 X NEXT (14…16) 14: for day 15: for night 16: for lunch CO line no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT (Normal/UCD/ MODEM) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature Guide 221 3.3 PT Programming <To select BV> NEXT or PREV To continue 4 X NEXT (14…16) CO line no. (1…8/ ) 14: for day 15: for night 16: for lunch name* common BV OGM no. STORE SELECT name* (BV) END (01…24) To continue SELECT <To select DISA> NEXT or PREV To continue 4 X NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ (14…16) ) 14: for day 15: for night 16: for lunch name* SELECT DISA OGM no. (DISA) (1…8) STORE END To continue SELECT <To select DIL> NEXT or PREV To continue 4 X NEXT (14…16) 14: for day 15: for night 16: for lunch Notes • • CO line no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT (DIL) STORE END (01…24) To continue SELECT When you select "UCD", it is necessary to assign an extension group as the UCD group in UCD Group [520]. After you select "BV", do not change Operator Assignment [008]. Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL) 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) 2.3.1 PC Programming Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] 222 extension jack no. Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Pause Time [417] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 1 7 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT (1.5/2.5/ 3.5/4.5 s) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] Host PBX Access Code [403] Flash/Recall Time [418] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 1 8 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT (80/100/160/ 300/600/900/ 1200 ms) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.10.6 Flash/Recall 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Automatic Designated Line Access [419] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 1 9 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) name* SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Automatic Line Access [121] Feature Guide 223 3.3 PT Programming CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420] or NEXT PREV To continue 4 2 0 NEXT X CO line no. (1…8/ (00…75) ) STORE END To continue SELECT Note CPC signal detect time selection number: 00: Disable; 01–75: 22–614 ms (detect time: 8 ms increments) Feature & Programming References 1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421] or NEXT PREV To continue 4 2 1 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Note When this programme is disabled, CPC Signal Detection is only activated during an incoming outside (CO) line call or after an outgoing outside (CO) line call is placed on hold. Feature & Programming References 1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection Disconnect Time [422] or NEXT PREV To continue 4 2 2 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) SELECT STORE Refer to the note.* To continue SELECT 224 Feature Guide END 3.3 PT Programming Notes • • * The disconnect signal lengths that can be selected depend on your country/area as follows: For United Kingdom: 0.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s For South Africa: 0.8 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s For Others: 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s The time you select must be longer than the requirements of your telephone company or host PBX. Feature & Programming References 1.10.6 Flash/Recall CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] or NEXT PREV To continue 4 2 3 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ SELECT ) STORE END (Single/Double/ Triple) To continue SELECT Note It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]. Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Polarity Reverse Detection [424] or NEXT PREV To continue 4 2 4 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit Feature Guide 225 3.3 PT Programming Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only) or NEXT PREV To continue 4 2 5 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Note This programme enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls from the telephone company. Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) or NEXT PREV To continue 4 2 6 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only) 226 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only) or PREV NEXT To continue Go to next or prev. line number âžž âžž or To continue Go to next or prev. jack number 4 X NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ (27…29) # extension jack no. (01…24/ ) 27: for day 28: for night 29: for lunch SELECT STORE END ) (Enable/ Disable) To continue Go to another jack number To continue SELECT Go to another line number Note This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only). Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only) NEXT or PREV To continue Go to next or prev. line number âžž âžž or To continue Go to next or prev. jack number 4 X NEXT (30…32) CO line no. (1…8/ ) # extension jack no. (01…24/ 30: for day 31: for night 32: for lunch SELECT STORE END ) (Enable/ Disable) To continue Go to another jack number SELECT To continue Go to another line number Feature Guide 227 3.3 PT Programming Note This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only). Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only) or NEXT PREV To continue 4 X NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ (33…34) SELECT ) STORE END (Single/Double/ Triple) To continue 33: for Pattern 2 34: for Pattern 3 SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] NEXT or PREV To continue 4 X CO line no. NEXT (38…40) (1…8/ name* common BV OGM no. name* (BV01…24/ Not Stored) ) 38: for day 39: for night 40: for lunch STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] 5 0 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Without AA/ With AA) Note Without AA: Available destinations are extension numbers assigned in Extension Number [009], Outside (CO) Line Access numbers (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 88), and the Operator Call number (0 or 9) With AA: Available destinations are numbers available in "Without AA" mode and numbers (0 through 9) assigned in DISA Built-in AA [501] 228 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Built-in AA [501] NEXT or PREV To continue extension jack no. 5 0 1 NEXT AA no. (0…9) SELECT (Jack/GRP/ 3-level AA/ Not Stored) (01…24) or STORE END extension group no. (1…8) Note If you would like to use the Automatic Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9]) and/or Operator Call number in AA mode, do not assign AA number(s) that correspond to Automatic Line Access or Operator Call numbers (9 and/or 0). Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) FAX Connection [503] 5 0 3 NEXT extension jack no. STORE END (01…24/Disable) Notes • • To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Delayed Answer Time [504] 5 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (0/3/6/12 s) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Wait Time after OGM [505] 5 0 5 NEXT SELECT (0/5/10/15 s) Feature Guide 229 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Busy Mode [506] <To select Disconnect or Call Waiting> 5 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Disconnect/ Call Waiting) <To select DISA> 5 0 6 NEXT SELECT DISA OGM no. (DISA) (1…8) STORE Feature & Programming References 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Intercept Mode [507] 5 0 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Intercept/ Disconnect) Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.19 Voice Mail Features DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508] 5 0 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END (10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s) Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Intercept Mode [507] DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509] 5 0 9 NEXT SELECT (10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s) Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 230 Feature Guide STORE END END 3.3 PT Programming DISA Intercept Mode [507] DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508] DISA No Dial Mode [510] 5 1 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Intercept/ Disconnect) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Security Mode [511] 5 1 1 NEXT SELECT (Trunk/All/ None Security) Note Trunk Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code assigned in DISA Security Code [512] before making an outside (CO) line call. All Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside (CO) line or intercom call. No Security: Allows the caller to make either an outside (CO) line or intercom call without entering a DISA security code. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Security Code [512] NEXT or PREV To continue 5 1 2 NEXT code no. security code STORE (1…4) 4…10 digits (0…9) To continue END SELECT WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call feature of DISA. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a) Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security). b) Maintaining the secrecy of passwords. c) Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed. Feature Guide 231 3.3 PT Programming d) Changing passwords regularly. Note The number of digits for DISA security codes is selected in DISA Security Code Digits [530]. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Security Mode [511] Cyclic Tone Detection [513] 5 1 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Disable/ 2/3/4 times) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) FAX Tone Detection [514] 5 1 4 NEXT SELECT (1/2 time(s)) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) FAX Connection [503] Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] 5 1 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END (3/6/9 s) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA No Dial Mode [510] DISA Incoming Assignment [516] NEXT or PREV To continue 5 1 6 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue SELECT 232 Feature Guide END 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA AA Wait Time [517] 5 1 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END (1…5 s) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Built-in AA [501] DISA Tone after Security Code [518] 5 1 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Security Code [512] OGM Mute Time [519] 5 1 9 NEXT SELECT (0/2/4/6 s) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) UCD Group [520] 5 2 0 NEXT extension group no. STORE END (1…8) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 2.2.2 Group UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] 5 2 1 NEXT waiting time SELECT STORE END (1…32 min/1…59 s) (min/s) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Busy Mode [523] Feature Guide 233 3.3 PT Programming UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] 5 2 2 NEXT SELECT STORE END (30 s/ 1/1.5/2 min) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] UCD Busy Mode [523] <To select Intercept-Normal or Disconnect> 5 2 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Intercept-Normal/ Disconnect) <To select Intercept-DISA or Disconnect-OGM> 5 2 3 NEXT SELECT DISA/UCD OGM no. (1…8) (Intercept-DISA/ Disconnect-OGM) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Intercept Mode [524] 5 2 4 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Intercept/ Disconnect) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525] 5 2 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END (10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Intercept Mode [524] UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] 5 2 6 NEXT SELECT (10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s) 234 Feature Guide STORE END STORE END 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Intercept Mode [524] UCD Waiting Message [527] 5 2 7 UCD OGM no. NEXT STORE END (1…8/ Not Stored) Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD DISA Security Code Digits [530] 5 3 0 NEXT SELECT STORE END (4…10 digits) Note When this setting is changed, DISA security codes that have already been assigned in DISA Security Code [512] will be cleared. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Ringback Tone [531] 5 3 1 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Ringback Tone/ Hold Music) Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] Go to another third AA number NEXT or PREV Go to next or prev. third AA number extension jack no. 5 X NEXT (40…49) [40-49: AA no. 0-9] second AA no. third SELECT AA no. name* (0…9) (0…9, [ ) (Jack/GRP/ : Skip] 3-level AA/ Not Stored) (01…24) or To continue STORE END extension group no. (1…8) Feature Guide 235 3.3 PT Programming Notes • • This programme is available only when "3-level AA" is selected for each AA number in DISA Builtin AA [501]. Only when you select " " as the third AA number, you can select "3-level AA" in the next step. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599] 5 9 9 NEXT STORE END Feature & Programming References 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD Extension Group [600] NEXT PREV or To continue 6 0 0 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ extension group no. STORE (1…8) ) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting 2.2.2 Group TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 X (01…03) NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) 01: for day 02: for night 03: for lunch Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) 236 Feature Guide COS no. STORE (1…5) To continue SELECT END END 3.3 PT Programming Extension Name [604] NEXT PREV or To continue 6 0 4 NEXT extension jack no. extension name* STORE Max. 10 characters To continue (01…24) END SELECT Note * An extension name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT. Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters Account Code Mode [605] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 0 5 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ SELECT STORE END ) (Option/Forced/ Verify-All/Verify-Toll) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code Account Code [310] Call Transfer to CO Line [606] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 0 6 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature Guide 237 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.11.1 Call Transfer 1.13.1.2 Conference Call Forwarding to CO Line [607] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 0 7 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Executive Busy Override [608] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 0 8 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.7.2 Executive Busy Override DND Override [609] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 0 9 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) 238 Feature Guide STORE To continue END 3.3 PT Programming Parallelled Telephone [610] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 0 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone TAM Extension [611] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 1 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup Room Monitor [612] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 2 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.10.2 Room Monitor Feature Guide 239 3.3 PT Programming CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 3 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212] Internal Pulse Detection [614] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 4 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] LCD Language [615] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 5 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ SELECT STORE END ) Refer to the note.* To continue SELECT Notes • • • 240 * The following languages are available for the LCD: English; Spanish; Portuguese; Russian; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian; Ukrainian Selections vary depending on your country/area. Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU. When "Russian" or "Ukrainian" is selected in this programme, during intercom calls, the calling extension's name assigned in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] is displayed at the called extension. Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming When another language is selected, the calling extension's name assigned in Extension Name [604] is displayed. Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 6 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24) extension name* Max. 10 characters STORE END To continue SELECT Notes • • * An extension name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic alphabet mode", and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT. Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU. Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters LCD Language [615] Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 8 NEXT extension jack no. name* SELECT (01…24/ ) (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.17.1 Message Waiting Feature Guide 241 3.3 PT Programming SLT Message Waiting [619] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 1 9 NEXT extension jack no. name* SELECT (01…24/ ) STORE (Enable/ Disable) END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.17.1 Message Waiting LCS Recording Mode Set [620] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 2 0 NEXT extension jack no. name* SELECT (01…24/ STORE ) (Stop recording/ Keep recording) END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration BV Resource [621] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 2 1 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT STORE (Resource 1/2) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) 242 Feature Guide END 3.3 PT Programming BV for Extension [622] or NEXT PREV To continue 6 2 2 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) BV Access Code through CO Line [625] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 2 5 NEXT extension jack no. voice message access code (01…24) 4…10 digits (0…9, #) STORE END To continue SELECT Notes • • A voice message access code should be different from the corresponding extension number. If the voice message access code is the same as an extension number, dialling that number will access the extension, not the voice message area. A code that starts with a number already assigned as another code cannot be used. For example, if you assign the codes "1234" and "12345", "12345" cannot be selected since "1234" will be recognised first. Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) BGM Control for APT [626] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 2 6 NEXT extension jack no. name* SELECT (01…24/ ) (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM) Feature Guide 243 3.3 PT Programming SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 2 7 NEXT extension jack no. name* SELECT (01…24/ ) STORE END (0…15 s) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID SLT Caller ID [628] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 2 8 NEXT extension jack no. name* SELECT (01…24/ ) (Enable/ Disable) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] NEXT or PREV To continue 6 2 9 NEXT extension jack no. name* SELECT (01…24/ ) (Disable/ Single/Double) SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.16.1 Caller ID 244 Feature Guide STORE To continue END 3.3 PT Programming Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] or PREV NEXT To continue Go to next or prev. doorphone number âžž âžž or To continue Go to next or prev. jack number 7 X NEXT doorphone no. (1…4/ (00…02) # extension jack no. (01…24/ ) 00: for day 01: for night 02: for lunch ) SELECT STORE END (Enable/ Disable) To continue Go to another jack number To continue SELECT Go to another doorphone number Feature & Programming References 1.15.1 Doorphone Call Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705] or PREV NEXT To continue Go to next or prev. door opener number âžž âžž or To continue Go to next or prev. jack number 7 X NEXT (03…05) door opener no. (1…4/ ) # extension jack no. SELECT (01…24/ 03: for day 04: for night 05: for lunch ) STORE END (Enable/ Disable) To continue Go to another jack number SELECT To continue Go to another door opener number Feature & Programming References 1.15.2 Door Open Feature Guide 245 3.3 PT Programming Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] NEXT or PREV To continue 7 0 6 NEXT doorphone no. (1…4/ SELECT ) (Single/Double/ Triple/S-Double) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.15.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Access Tone [707] NEXT or PREV To continue 7 0 7 NEXT doorphone no. (1…4/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.10.2 Room Monitor 1.15.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Ring Time [708] NEXT or PREV To continue 7 0 8 NEXT doorphone no. (1…4/ ) SELECT STORE (15/30 s) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.1 Doorphone Call 246 Feature Guide END 3.3 PT Programming Door Open Duration [709] or PREV NEXT To continue 7 0 9 NEXT door opener no. (1…4/ SELECT ) STORE END (1…8 s) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.2 Door Open Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] or PREV NEXT To continue 7 1 0 NEXT doorphone no. (1…4/ ) name* SELECT (Ring/Chime/ Ring & Chime) STORE END To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] Doorphone Chime Assignment [711] NEXT or PREV To continue 7 1 1 NEXT doorphone no. (1…4/ ) name* SELECT STORE END (Relay1…4) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] Feature Guide 247 3.3 PT Programming Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] NEXT or PREV To continue 7 1 2 NEXT doorphone no. (1…4/ ) name* SELECT STORE END (Pattern1…8) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800] <Select the new line code> 8 0 0 NEXT SELECT STORE <Select the baud rate> NEXT (CR+LF/CR) NEXT SELECT STORE <Select the stop bit length> SELECT STORE NEXT (Mark/Space/ Even/Odd/ None*) (7/8 bits) Notes • • <Select the parity> NEXT STORE (1200/2400/ 4800/9600 B) CR: Carriage Return LF: Line Feed <Select the word length> SELECT SELECT STORE END (1 bit/2 bits) * Select "None" when the printer does not require error checking. The following combinations are invalid. Parity Word length Stop bit length Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone will be heard. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 248 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming SMDR Parameter [801] <Select the page length> 8 0 1 NEXT page length STORE (4…99 lines) <Select the skip perforation> skip perforation STORE NEXT END (0…95 lines) Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] <Select an outgoing call> 8 0 2 NEXT SELECT <Select an incoming call> STORE NEXT (On/Off/Toll) SELECT STORE END (On/Off) Note Outgoing Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)/Toll (Print toll calls only) Incoming Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing) Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803] 8 0 3 NEXT SELECT STORE END (No Printing/ Printing) Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) System Speed Dialling Number [001] System Data Dump [804] <To select All parameters, System parameter, Speed dial, and/or Stop output> 8 0 4 NEXT SELECT (All para/ System para/ Speed dial/ Stop output) STORE END To continue Feature Guide 249 3.3 PT Programming <To select the CO (outside line) parameter> 8 0 4 NEXT SELECT CO line no. STORE (1…8/ (CO para) STORE ) END To continue <To select the Extension parameter> 8 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE extension jack no. (01…24/ (Extn. para) ) STORE END To continue <To select the DSS parameter> 8 0 4 NEXT SELECT STORE DSS console no. (1…2/ (DSS para) ) STORE To continue Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Account Code [805] 8 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END (CODE/INDEX) Feature & Programming References 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Account Code [310] Account Code Mode [605] SMDR Language [806] 8 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END Refer to the note.* Note * The following languages are available for SMDR: English; Spanish; Portuguese; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian Selections vary depending on your country/area. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) BV Total Recording Time [807] 8 0 7 NEXT SELECT (20/30/60 min) 250 Feature Guide STORE END END 3.3 PT Programming Note The recording quality depends on the setting time. 20 (min): High; 30: Normal; 60: Low Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) BV Card Initialisation [808] 8 0 8 NEXT STORE END Note When this programme is performed, the PBX is reset. Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) Caller ID [900] NEXT or PREV To continue 9 0 0 NEXT CO line no. name* SELECT STORE (1…8/ (Enable/ Disable) To continue ) END SELECT Note The DISA Delayed Answer Time for the outside (CO) lines enabled here will always be 6 seconds even if "0 s" or "3 s" is selected in DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]. Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID Caller ID Area Code [901] NEXT or PREV To continue 9 0 1 NEXT code no. area code STORE (1…5) Max. 6 digits (0…9) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID Feature Guide 251 3.3 PT Programming 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902] SELECT To continue <Select the removed digits> 9 0 2 NEXT code no. removed digits (1…5) (0…9) STORE END <Select the added number> âžž added number STORE END Max. 4 digits (0…9, , #) Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Area Code [901] Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903] <Select the removed digits> 9 0 3 NEXT removed digits STORE END (0…9) <Select the added number> âžž added number STORE END Max. 4 digits (0…9, , #) Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Log Priority [904] NEXT or PREV To continue 9 0 4 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT STORE (Name/ Number) To continue END SELECT Note This programme is available when the Caller ID service provides both a name and a number. If only the number is provided, this programme is not necessary. 252 Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log 1.18.4 Display Information Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905] 9 0 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID Caller ID SMDR Format [906] 9 0 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Without CID: Not printed/ With CID: Printed) Note Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] 9 0 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Common Area Call Log Check [909] NEXT or PREV To continue 9 0 9 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue END SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Feature Guide 253 3.3 PT Programming Caller ID Type [910] or NEXT PREV To continue 9 1 0 NEXT CO line no. (1…8/ ) SELECT STORE END (FSK/DTMF) To continue SELECT Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID Call Log Next Page [927] 9 2 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note This programme enables the PBX to include page breaks when printing out call logs for each extension. SMDR Mode for Printing [929] 9 2 9 NEXT SELECT STORE END (MODE 1/MODE 2) Note Even if "On" (outgoing/incoming call) or "Toll" (outgoing call) is selected in Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802], when "MODE 2" is selected in this programme, the call log information is not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension Call Forwarding Selection [963] NEXT or PREV To continue 9 6 3 NEXT extension jack no. (01…24/ ) SELECT STORE (Enable/ Disable) To continue SELECT 254 Feature Guide END 3.3 PT Programming Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] TRS Check after Answering [966] 9 6 6 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Note This programme specifies whether the PBX checks DTMF signals when answering calls or not. TRS Check Time after Answering [967] 9 6 7 NEXT SELECT STORE END (5/10/15/ 20/30/60 s) Note This programme specifies the length of time that the DTMF signal is checked when "Enable" is selected in TRS Check after Answering [966]. KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] 9 6 8 NEXT SELECT STORE END (Enable/Disable) Feature & Programming References 1.17.1 Message Waiting Country [995] 9 9 5 NEXT SELECT STORE END (NE: NE (ES)/NE (IT)) (CE: CE/CE (CZ)) Notes • • This programme specifies your country/area when the suffix of the PBX is "NE" or "CE". For more information, please consult your dealer. When the country code is changed, all system data is initialised. Feature & Programming References 2.3.6 Country Setting Feature Guide 255 3.3 PT Programming Firmware Version [998] 9 9 8 NEXT SELECT Display Example END < ROM > SELECT < Firmware > Y501A 040430 (BX) 1.0.0 Version Version Date Note You can confirm the ROM and the firmware version of the PBX alternately by pressing SELECT. Feature & Programming References 2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade System Data Clear [999] <To select All parameters, System parameter, and/or Speed Dial> 9 9 9 NEXT SELECT STORE (All para/ System para/ Speed dial) END To continue <To select the CO (outside line) parameter> 9 9 9 NEXT SELECT STORE CO line no. (1…8/ (CO para) STORE ) END To continue <To select the Extension parameter> 9 9 9 NEXT SELECT STORE extension jack no. (01…24/ (Extn. para) ) STORE END To continue <To select the DSS parameter> 9 9 9 NEXT SELECT (DSS para) Feature & Programming References 2.3.2 PT Programming 256 Feature Guide STORE DSS console no. (1…2/ ) STORE To continue END Section 4 Appendix Feature Guide 257 4.1 Capacity of System Resources 4.1 Capacity of System Resources 4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources Category System Item Outside (CO) Line Group 8 Extension Group 8 Absent Message 6 × 16 characters Message Waiting 8/extn. Number of Characters of Name Extension Number Digits Conference (5-party) 1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Intercom Call Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/ UCD Toll Restriction (TRS) 258 Feature Guide 2 or 3 10 Host PBX Access Code Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 10 Call Park Zone Account Code Dialling KX-TES824/KX-TEM824 4 digits, 50 entries 1 or 2 digits, 8 entries 64 calls 4 32 resources/PBX (8 resources for Direct Inward System Access [DISA]/ Uniform Call Distribution [UCD], 24 resources for 3-level Automated Attendant [AA]) Emergency Call 24 digits, 5 entries Quick Dialling 10 digits, 10 entries System Speed Dialling 32 digits, 100 entries Personal Speed Dialling 24 digits, 10 entries/extn. One-touch Dialling 24 digits Hot Line 32 digits Redial 64 digits Leading Number Table 7 digits, 80 entries Leading Number Exception Table 7 digits, 80 entries ARS Carrier 4 Class of Service (COS) 5 Denied Code Table 11 digits, 80 entries Exception Code Table 11 digits, 80 entries 4.1 Capacity of System Resources Category Call Log Item Incoming Call Log KX-TES824/KX-TEM824 20 entries/extn., 300 entries/PBX 125 voice messages/Built-in Voice Message (BV) resource Password System Password Extension Password Voice Message Access Code 4–7 digits 4 digits 4–10 digits Feature Guide 259 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones Tone Patterns Dial Tone 1 Normal Dial Tone 2 Any of the following features is set: • Absent Message • Background Music (BGM) (proprietary telephone [PT] only) • Call Forwarding (FWD) • Call Pickup Deny • Data Line Security • Do Not Disturb (DND) • Extension Lock • Hot Line (single line telephone [SLT] only) • Message Waiting (PT only) • Remote Extension Lock • Timed Reminder Dial Tone 3 • • • When going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting When Account Code Entry is performed When answering a call from Timed Reminder Dial Tone 4 A new voice message has been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]). 260 Feature Guide 1s 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones Dial Tone 5 1s The remaining voice message recording time is less than 5 minutes or 125 voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]). Busy Tone Reorder Tone The outside (CO) line you tried to seize is not assigned or was denied. Ringback Tones Single (3-s interval) Double (3-s interval) Single (5-s interval) Double (5-s interval) DND Tone The dialled extension is refusing incoming calls. Call Waiting Tone 1 Call Waiting Tone 2 15 s 1s Single Double Feature Guide 261 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones Triple 1s Hold Alarm Tone 15 s A call has been on hold for longer than the specified time. Warning Tone (Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation) This tone is sent 15 seconds before the specified time for disconnection. Confirmation Tone 1 The feature was set successfully, or the Extension Lock feature was set or cancelled. Confirmation Tone 2 The new feature setting was the same as the previous setting, or certain features were successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold, Automatic Callback Busy). Confirmation Tone 3 Before the following features activate: • Retrieving a held call • Picking up another call • Establishing a conference • Paging/Answering a paging announcement 262 Feature Guide 1s 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones Ring Tone Patterns Ring Tone Patterns The following ring tone patterns can be assigned to incoming call types (outside (CO) line, intercom, or doorphone calls), or are fixed for certain call types (Hold Recall, Timed Reminder, or Camp-on Recall). Single (Incoming calls/Hold Recall [outside (CO) line calls]) 1s Double (Incoming calls/Hold Recall [intercom calls]) Triple (Incoming calls/Timed Reminder) S-Double (Incoming calls [doorphone calls only]/Camp-on Recall) Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand only) The following ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company can be detected for each outside (CO) line. Pattern 1 1s Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Feature Guide 263 4.2 Tones/Ring Tones Doorphone Chime Patterns The following doorphone chime patterns can be assigned to each doorphone when doorbells and door chimes are connected to the PBX. Pattern 1* 1s Pattern 2* Pattern 3* Pattern 4* Pattern 5 Pattern 6 Pattern 7 Pattern 8 * Chime patterns 1 to 4 are played only one time during the doorphone ringing time. 264 Feature Guide Index Feature Guide 265 Index Numerics 1st Carrier Selection Code [359] 215 2-way Recording into the VPS 144 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] 235 3-level Automated Attendant (AA) 105 3-party Conference 97 5-party Conference 97 A Absent Message 128 Account Code [310] 213 Account Code Entry 43 Account Code Mode [605] 237 Administrative Information Output Features 149 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 39 Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 39 Answering Features 35 Answering Features—OVERVIEW 35 Appendix 257 ARS CO Line Group [364] 216 ARS Dial Tone [362] 216 ARS Inter-digit Time [363] 216 ARS Modification—Added Number [361] 216 ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360] 215 ARS Selection [350] 214 ARS —> Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 72 Audible Tone Features 157 Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390] 218 Authorisation Code 75 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 61 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type 180 Automatic Designated Line Access [419] 223 Automatic Line Access (Local Access) 51 Automatic Line Access [121] 204 Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] 214 Automatic Redial 57 Automatic Redial Interval [114] 203 Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113] 202 Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122] 204 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 72 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 72 Automatic Time Adjustment 174 Automatic Time Adjustment [152] 208 B Background Music (BGM) 104 Bell Frequency [120] 204 Bell-off Detection [213] 211 BGM Control for APT [626] 243 BGM —> Background Music (BGM) 104 Break Ratio [123] 205 Built-in Voice Message (BV) 114 Busy Line/Busy Party Features 61 Busy Tone 261 Buttons and Functions 188 BV Access Code through CO Line [625] 243 BV Card Initialisation [808] 251 BV for Extension [622] 243 BV Recording Time [214] 211 266 Feature Guide BV Resource [621] 242 BV Total Recording Time [807] 250 BV —> Built-in Voice Message (BV) 114 C Call Duration Counter Start [204] 209 Call Forwarding (FWD) 31 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 30 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW 30 Call Forwarding Selection [963] 254 Call Forwarding Start Time [202] 209 Call Forwarding to CO Line [607] 238 Call Handling Features 13 Call Hold 90 Call Log Next Page [927] 254 Call Log Printout for Each Extension 154 Call Park 92 Call Park Recall 92 Call Pickup 37 Call Pickup Deny 37 Call Pickup Tone [117] 203 Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 37 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS 129 Call Splitting 93 Call Transfer 88 Call Transfer to CO Line [606] 237 Call Transfer with Announcement 88 Call Transfer without Announcement 88 Call Transfer—Screened —> Call Transfer with Announcement 88 Call Transfer—Unscreened —> Call Transfer without Announcement 88 Call Waiting 22 Call Waiting Tone 63 Caller ID 119 Caller ID [900] 251 Caller ID Area Code [901] 251 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905] 253 Caller ID Display on SLT 119 Caller ID Features 119 Caller ID Log Priority [904] 252 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902] 252 Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903] 252 Caller ID SMDR Format [906] 253 Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] 253 Caller ID Type [910] 254 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 87 Capacity of System Resources 258 Carrier Exception Code [300] 212 Circular Hunting 23 Class of Service (COS) 161 Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599] 236 CO Indicator [109] 201 CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613] 240 CO Line Connection [400] 218 CO Line Group Number [404] 219 CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] 221 CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] 225 Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only) 226 Common Area Call Log Check [909] 253 Index Common BV OGM 114 Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215] 212 Conference 97 Conference Features 96 Conference Features—OVERVIEW 96 Conference Pattern [116] 203 Conference Tone [105] 200 Confirmation Tone 158 Console Paired Telephone [004] 195 Consultation Hold 95 Conversation Features 78 COS —> Class of Service (COS) 161 CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205] 210 Country [995] 255 Country Setting 181 CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420] 224 CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421] 224 CPC —> Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 87 Cyclic Tone Detection [513] 232 D Data Line Security 82 Date & Time [000] 193 Delayed Ringing 28 Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413] 221 Denied Code Tables 64 Dial Mode [401] 218 Dial Tone 157 Dial Type Selection 44 Dialling Start Time [206] 210 DIL —> Direct In Line (DIL) 14 Direct In Line (DIL) 14 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 106 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 28 Direct Message feature 117 Direct One-touch Answering 35 Direct Outside (CO) Line Access 51 Directed Call Pickup 37 DISA AA Service 106 DISA AA Wait Time [517] 233 DISA Built-in AA [501] 229 DISA Busy Mode [506] 230 DISA Delayed Answer Time [504] 229 DISA Incoming Assignment [516] 232 DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] 228 DISA Intercept Mode [507] 230 DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] 228 DISA No Dial Mode [510] 231 DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509] 230 DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508] 230 DISA Ringback Tone [531] 235 DISA Security Code [512] 231 DISA Security Code Digits [530] 235 DISA Security Mode [511] 231 DISA Tone after Security Code [518] 233 DISA Wait Time after OGM [505] 229 DISA —> Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 28, 106 Disconnect Time [422] 224 Display Information 139 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) 226 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand 20 DND Override 34 DND Override [609] 238 DND Tone 261 DND —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30 Do Not Disturb (DND) 34 Door Open 101 Door Open Duration [709] 247 Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705] 245 Doorbell/Door Chime 102 Doorphone Access Tone [707] 246 Doorphone Call 100 Doorphone Chime Assignment [711] 247 Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] 248 Doorphone Chime Patterns 264 Doorphone Ring Time [708] 246 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] 246 Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] 247 Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] 245 DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only) 228 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] 227 (New Zealand only) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only) 227 DRD —> Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand 20 DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] 195 DSS Lamp Mode [112] 202 DSS Off-hook Mode [126] 205 DTMF Integration [103] 200 DTMF Integration Port [102] 200 DTMF Receiver Check [107] 201 DTMF Time [210] 211 E EFA —> External Feature Access (EFA) 84 Electronic Station Lockout —> Extension Lock 70 Emergency Call 42 Emergency Number [309] 213 Entering Characters 190 Entering Manager Programming Mode 189 Entering System Programming Mode 189 Exception Code Tables 64 Exclusive Call Hold 90 Executive Busy Override 62 Executive Busy Override [608] 238 Executive Busy Override Deny 62 Extension Controlling Features 155 Extension Feature Clear 155 Extension Group [600] 236 Extension Jack Configuration 160 Extension Lock 70 Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL 70 Extension Name [604] 237 Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] 241 Extension Number [009] 197 Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] 203 Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212] 211 Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration 85 Feature Guide 267 Index External Feature Access (EFA) 84 External Pager Access Tone [106] 201 F Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 183 FAX Connection [503] 229 FAX Tone Detection [514] 232 Feature Guide References 2 Feature Highlights 5 Feature Numbering 175 Firmware Upgrade 182 Firmware Version [998] 256 Fixed Buttons 133 Flash/Recall 83 Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] 202 Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108] 201 Flash/Recall Time [418] 223 Flexible Buttons 135 Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407] 220 Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410] 220 FWD to Outside (CO) Line 31 FWD —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30 FWD—All Calls 31 FWD—Busy/No Answer 31 FWD—Follow Me 31 G General Call Hold Group 162 Group Call Pickup 90 37 H Handset/Headset Selection —> Headset Operation 81 Hands-free Answerback 38 Hands-free Operation 78 Headset Operation 81 Hold Recall 90 Hold Recall Time [200] 209 Holding Features 90 Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] 210 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a 47 Host PBX) Host PBX Access Code [403] 219 Hot Line 60 Hot Line Waiting Time [203] 209 Hunting Group Set [100] 199 Hunting Type [101] 199 K KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling 56 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] 199 255 L Last Number Redial 57 LCD Language [615] 240 LCD Time Display [010] 197 LCS Recording Mode Set [620] 242 LED Indication 137 Line Preference Override 50 Line Preference—Incoming 36 Line Preference—Outgoing 50 Live Call Screening (LCS) 143 Lockout 85 Log-in/Log-out 29 M Making Call Features 39 Memory Dialling Features 53 Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW 53 Message Features 126 Message Waiting 126 Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] 241 Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock 126 Microphone Mute 80 Music on Hold 94 Music on Hold [111] 202 N I Idle Extension Hunting 23 Idle Line Preference 50 Incoming Call Features 14 Incoming Call Indication Features 17 Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW 17 Incoming Call Log 123 Incoming Call Log Display Lock 124 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features 14 Incoming Reverse [153] 208 268 Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] 249 Installation Manual References 2 Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console 187 Intercept Routing 15 Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 15 Intercept Routing—No Dial 15 Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] 232 Intercom Call 39 Intercom Call Features 39 Inter-digit Time [208] 210 Internal Call Features 16 Internal Pulse Detection [614] 240 Introduction 186 IRNA —> Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 15 Itemised Billing Code 75 Itemised Billing Code [389] 217 Feature Guide No Dial Disconnection [211] 211 No Line Preference 36, 50 O OGM Mute Time [519] 233 One-touch Dialling 55 One-touch Transfer 88 One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] Operator Assignment [008] 196 Operator Call 168 195 Index Operator/Manager Features 167 Optional Device Features 100 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD 105 Outside (CO) Line Access 51 Outside (CO) Line Call Features 41 Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW 41 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation 85 Outside (CO) Line Group Access 51 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection 18 Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration 85 Ring Tone Patterns 263 Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand 263 only) Ringback Tone Pattern [128] 205 Ringback Tones 261 Ringing Line Preference 36 Room Monitor 79 Room Monitor [612] 239 Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] 217 Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] 215 Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] 217 Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] 214 P Paging 99 Paging Deny 99 Paging Features 99 Paging—All Extensions 99 Paging—All Extensions & External 99 Paging—External 99 Paging—Group 99 Parallelled Telephone 86 Parallelled Telephone [610] 239 Password Security 186 Pause Insertion 46 Pause Time [417] 223 PC Programming 169, 187 Personal BV OGM 114 Pickup Dialling —> Hot Line 60 Pickup Group [127] 205 Polarity Reverse Detection [424] 225 Polarity Reverse Detection —> Reverse Circuit 45 Power Failure Connections 183 Power Failure Restart 184 Power Failure Transfer 183 Prime Line Preference 36, 50 Programming Instructions 185, 188 Programming Procedures 193 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 133 PT Programming 172, 188 PT Programming References 2 PT —> Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 133 Pulse Restriction [118] 204 Pulse Speed [402] 219 Pulse to Tone Conversion 44 S Q Quick Dialling 59 R Receiving Calls 35 Receiving Group Features 23 Redial 57 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] 204 Remote Extension Lock 70 Remote Station Lock Control —> Remote Extension Lock Remote Timed Reminder 156 Reorder Tone 261 Required Telephone 188 Reverse Circuit 45 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 19 70 Saved Number Redial 57 S-CO Line Access 51 Second Feature Numbering Plan [012] 198 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803] 249 Seizing a Line Features 49 Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW 49 SLT Caller ID [628] 244 SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] 208 SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150] 208 SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] 244 SLT Hold Mode [104] 200 SLT Message Waiting [619] 242 SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] 207 SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627] 244 SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] 206 SMDR Account Code [805] 250 SMDR Language [806] 250 SMDR Mode for Printing [929] 254 SMDR Parameter [801] 249 SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800] 248 SMDR —> Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 149 SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145] 207 SMS Routing Table—CO [146] 207 SMS Routing Table—Extension [147] 208 SMS —> Short Message Service (SMS) 129 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 58 Station Feature Clear —> Extension Feature Clear 155 Station Hunting —> Idle Extension Hunting 23 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 149 Station Programme Clear —> Extension Feature Clear 155 Station Speed Dialling —> Personal Speed Dialling 58 System Configuration and Administration Features 159 System Configuration—Hardware 160 System Configuration—Software 161 System Data Clear [999] 256 System Data Control 169 System Data Dump [804] 249 System Password [002] 194 System Requirements 187 System Speed Dialling Name [011] 198 System Speed Dialling Number [001] 193 T TAM Extension [611] 239 TAM —> Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 37 Feature Guide 269 Index Terminated Hunting 23 Time Service 164 Time Service Start Time [007] 196 Time Service Switching Mode [006] 196 Timed Reminder 156 Toll Restriction (TRS) 64 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 64 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code 68 Tones/Ring Tones 260 Transfer Recall 88 Transfer Recall Time [201] 209 Transferring Features 88 TRS Check after Answering [966] 255 TRS Check for * and # [125] 205 TRS Check Time after Answering [967] 255 TRS for System Speed Dialling 65 TRS —> Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 64 TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603] 236 TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] 212 TRS—Exception Code [306] 213 TRS—Extension Lock Class [312] 214 TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301] 212 U UCD Busy Mode [523] 234 UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] 233 UCD Group [520] 233 UCD Intercept Mode [524] 234 UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] 234 UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] 234 UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525] 234 UCD Waiting Message [527] 235 Unattended Conference 97 Unattended Conference Recall 97 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 25 User Manual References 2 V VM 1 APT Port [130] 206 VM 2 APT Port [131] 206 VM —> Voice Mail Features 140 Voice Mail APT Integration 140 Voice Mail Features 140 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration 146 W Walking COS 71 Warning Tone (Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation) 270 Feature Guide 262 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan Copyright: This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. © 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved. PSQX3083ZA KK1004MN0
advertisement